Technical_sheets Technical Sheets

User Manual: Technical_sheets

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 227

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR
Basic speaker module
Description

351000
Front view

Basic speaker module for the creation of 2 WIRE audio systems. Fitted with loudspeaker
and microphone volume adjustment.
It manages up to 100 pushbutton calls using additional double row pushbuttons.
It can be used for opening an electrical door lock directly connected to the S+ and Sclamps (18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA holding current 30 Ohm max) and the connection
to a local door lock release pushbutton on the PL clamps. To be completed with
surround plate. The device must be physically configured.

5
4

Related items
351001
351002
351003
351011
351012
351013
351021
351022
351023
351041
351042
351043
351081
351082
351083
351005
351015
351025
51045
351085

Sfera New speaker module front cover - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module f/cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module f/cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module f/cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module f/cover, 4 pushbuttons on double column - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module f/cover, 4 pushbuttons on double column - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module f/cover, 4 pushbuttons on double column - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera Robur speaker module front cover (IK 10)
Sfera Robur speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton (IK 10)
Sfera Robur speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons (IK 10)
Sfera Robur speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column (IK 10)
Sfera Robur speaker module front cover, 4 pushbuttons on double column (IK 10)

Rear view

11
10

6
9

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled):

18 – 27 Vdc
15 mA
65 mA
(-25) – (+70) °C
IP 54

Legend
1. Microphone volume adjustment
2. Loudspeaker
3. Call pushbuttons
4. Microphone

Dimensional data

5. Loudspeaker volume adjustment
6. Plug-in clamps for the connection and control of the electrical door lock
(18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current 30 ohm max)

115 mm
BT00595-a -EN

7. Plug-in clamps for the connection of the local door lock release pushbutton
8. Plug-in clamps for 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection
9. Connector for the connection to subsequent pushbutton modules
91 mm

10. Jumper J1: when connected it enables the right pushbutton column.
When disconnected it enables the left pushbutton column
11. Configurator socket

188 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

351000
Configuration
The device must be configured with physical configurator connection to the appropriate sockets as follows:

T - door lock relay timing
Configurator

0 = no
configurator
4 sec.

M J1

1 sec 2 sec 3 sec

as
6 sec 8 sec 10 sec
pushbutt.

* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max after which it goes in stand-by.
In order to extend this type of operation over 10 seconds, use the actuator, item
346200 configured with MOD = 5.

M - enabling/disabling of call tones and door lock release tones
The M configurations gives the possibility of managing the entrance panel call and door
lock release tones according to the following table:

Configurator

Tone status

All tones
enabled

Door lock tone
disabled

Call tone
disabled

All tones
disabled

J1 - activation of call pushbutton columns
The J1 configurator gives the possibility of managing the Call pushbuttons of the speaker
module as follows:
J1 CONNECTED = Only the right pushbutton column is enabled
J1 DISCONNECTED = Both pushbutton columns are enabled (right + left)

N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets.
In common entrance panels made using pushbutton modules, 1 must be inserted in N of
the speaker module. The number of the first riser handset must be inserted in the local
entrance panels.
S - type of call signal
The configuration of S determines the call tone of handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.

For the SPRINT handsets, S sets the call ringtone, according to the following table:
Configurator

Type of bell

2-tone

One-tone

1200 Hz

600 Hz

0 Hz

2400 Hz

BT00595-a -EN

For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, S associates the Entrance panel to
the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose between 16 different
preset bells.

In one-family systems S=9 to configure the general call.

2 WIRE VDE system 189

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR
Speaker module
Description

Front view

Speaker module for the creation of 2 WIRE audio & video systems. Fitted with loudspeaker
and microphone volume adjustment. It can manage up to 100 pushbutton calls when using
additional double row pushbutton modules. It can be used for opening an electrical door lock
directly connected to the S+ and S- clamps (18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA holding current 30 Ohm
max) and the connection to a local door lock release pushbutton on the PL clamps. Preset for
additional power supply. Fitted with front LEDs for the notification of the operating status: door
lock release, communication active, call put through, and system busy. Integrated optic sensor
for the switching on of the night backlighting. To be completed with surround plate. The device
can be configured either physically or using the PC and the TiSferaDesign software.
Related items
351101
351102
351103
351111
351112
351113
351121
351122
351123
351141
351142
351143
351181
351182
351183
351105
351115
351125
351145
351185

351100

Sfera New speaker module front cover - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module f/cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module f/cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module f/cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module f/cover, 4 pushbuttons on double column - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module f/cover, 4 pushbuttons on double column - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New speaker module f/cover, 4 pushbuttons on double column - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera Robur speaker module front cover (IK 10)
Sfera Robur speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton (IK 10)
Sfera Robur speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons (IK 10)
Sfera Robur speaker module front cover on double column, 2 pushbuttons (IK 10)
Sfera Robur speaker module front cover on double column, 4 pushbuttons (IK 10)

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption (with backlighting LEDs off):
Stand by absorption (with backlighting LEDs on):
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled):

18 - 27 Vdc
10 mA
15 mA
65 mA
(-25) – (+70) °C
IP 54

Dimensional data
BT00596-a -EN

115 mm

91 mm

190 2 WIRE VDE system

4
5
6
7

Rear view

16
15
14
13

12 11

Legend
1. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : download/upload the advanced
configuration and device firmware update
2. Microphone volume adjustment
3. Loudspeaker
4. LED for door status notification.
GREEN ON = door open
5. LED for communication status notification. GREEN ON = active communication
6. LED for system status notification.
GREEN ON = put through call
RED ON= busy system
7. Light sensor for automatic switching on of the night backlighting
8. Call pushbuttons
9. Microphone
10. Loudspeaker volume adjustment
11. Plug-in clamps for the connection and control of the electrical door lock
(18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current 30 ohm max)
12. Plug-in clamps for the connection of the local door lock release pushbutton
13. Plug-in clamps for the connection of the local power supply and the 2 WIRE SCS BUS
14. Connector for the connection to subsequent pushbutton modules
15. Connector for the connection of the N&D 352400 camera module
16. Configurator socket
17. Connector for the connection of the 352700 inductive loop module

TECHNICAL SHEETS

351100
Configuration
The device must be configured. The configuration can be performed in two ways:

T - door lock relay timing

Mode 1 - with physical configurator connection
Mode 2 - with PC and software TiSferaDesign

Configurator

0 = no
configurator
4 sec

Mode 1

1 sec 2 sec 3 sec

as
6 sec 8 sec 10 sec
pushbutt.

Mode 1 requires the physical connection of the configurators to their sockets:

* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max after which it goes in stand-by.
In order to extend this type of operation over 10 seconds, use the actuator, item
346200 configured with MOD = 5.

M - enabling/disabling of call tones and door lock release tones, and
management of night backlighting always ON
The M configurations gives the possibility of managing the entrance panel call and door
lock release tones . It also gives the possibility of enabling night backlighting always ON
(light sensor disabled) according to the following table:

M J1 J2

Configurator

M=0

M=1

M=2

M=3

Tone status

All tones
enabled

Door lock tone
disabled

Call tone
disabled

All tones
disabled

M=4

M=5

M=6

Configurator
Backlighting status

P - entrance panel number
The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets.
In common entrance panels made using pushbutton modules, 1 must be inserted in N of
the speaker module. The number of the first riser handset must be inserted in the local
entrance panels.
S - type of call signal
The configuration of S determines the call tone of handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.

All tones
Door lock tone
Call tone
enabled
disabled
disabled
+
+
+
backlighting backlighting backlighting
always ON
always ON
always ON

M=7
All tones
disabled
+
backlighting
always ON

For the SPRINT handsets, S sets the call ringtone, according to the following table:
Configurator

Type of bell

2-tone

One-tone

1200 Hz

600 Hz

0 Hz

2400 Hz

J2 CONNECTED = Additional power supply disabled
J2 DISCONNECTED = Additional power supply enabled

BT00596-a -EN

For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, S associates the Entrance panel to
the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose between 16 different
preset bells.

Configurator J2 gives the possibility of enabling the additional power supply (1-2) of the
speaker module in the following mode :

In one-family systems S=9 to configure the general call.

2 WIRE VDE system 191

TECHNICAL SHEETS

351100
Mode 2
Mode 2 requires advanced configuration of the device, performed using a PC
and the TisferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the
www.bticino.com). For the connection to the PC use a USB - mini USB cable. The
software gives the possibility of configuring, programming, and updating the firmware
of the speaker module.The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the
speaker module gives the possibility of performing these operations without the need
to disassemble the device.

Warning: In order to correctly send the configuration to the device, jumper (J1) must be removed. Also ensure that there are no configurators connected to the socket on the back of
the module.

BT00596-a-EN

192 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR
Audio video module
Description

Front view

Audio/video module for the installation of 2 WIRE colour video systems.
With Colour camera with 1/3” sensor and white LEDs for the lighting of the shooting
field. Mist prevention heating resistance. Loudspeaker and Microphone volume
adjustments. It can manage up to 98 pushbutton calls using the additional double
row pushbutton modules. Horizontal and vertical camera position adjustment,
+/- 10° in both directions. It offers the possibility of opening an electrical door lock
directly connected to clamps S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA holding current
30 Ohm max) and of connecting a local door lock release pushbutton on clamps PL.
Preset for additional power supply. Fitted with front LEDs for the notification of the
operating status: door lock release, communication active, call put through, and
system busy. Integrated optic sensor for the switching on of the night backlighting.
To be completed with surround plate. The device must be configured physically or
using a PC and the TiSferaDesign software.
Related items
351201
351202
351203
351211
351212
351213
351221
351222
351223
351205
351215
351225

351200

Sfera New A/V front cover - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New A/V front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New A/V front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New A/V front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New A/V front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New A/V front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New A/V front cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New A/V front cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New A/V front cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera Robur A/V front cover (IK 10)
Sfera Robur A/V front cover, 1 pushbutton (IK 10)
Sfera Robur A/V front cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column (IK 10)

3
4

Rear view

13
18

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption (with backlighting LEDs off):
Stand by absorption (with backlighting LEDs on):
Max. operating absorption:
Colour sensor:
Lens:
Resolution:
Illumination of the viewing field:
Brightness adjustment:
Interlace:
Mist prevention heating resistance
Operating temperature:
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled):

18 - 27 Vdc
15 mA
20 mA
140 mA
1/3”
F2.5 f3.3 mm
330 TV lines (horizontal)
white LED
Automatic
2:1
(-25) - (+70)°C
IP 54

Dimensional data

91 mm

15 14

Legend
1. Loudspeaker
2. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : download/upload the advanced
configuration and device firmware update
3. Microphone volume adjustment
4. LED for door status notification.
GREEN ON = door open
5. LED for communication status notification. GREEN ON = active communication
6. LED for system status notification.
GREEN ON = put through call
RED ON= busy system
7. Call pushbuttons
8. White LEDs for night lighting of the shooting field
9. Light sensor for automatic switching on of the night backlighting
10. Colour camera
11. Microphone
12. Loudspeaker volume adjustment
13. Connector for the connection of the 352700 inductive loop module
14. Plug-in clamps for the connection and control of the electrical door lock
(18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current 30 ohm max)
15. Plug-in clamps for the connection of the local door lock release pushbutton
16. Plug-in clamps for the connection of the local power supply and the 2 WIRE SCS BUS
17. Connector for the connection to subsequent modules
18. Configurator socket

BT00597-a -EN

115 mm

2 WIRE VDE system 193

TECHNICAL SHEETS

351200
Configuration
The device must be configured. The configuration can be performed in two ways :
Mode 1 - with physical configurator connection
Mode 2 - with PC and software TiSferaDesign

M J1 J2

Mode 1
Mode 1 requires the physical connection of the configurators to their sockets
P - entrance panel number
The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets.
In common entrance panels made using pushbutton modules, 1 must be inserted in N of
the speaker module. The number of the first riser handset must be inserted in the local
entrance panels.
S - type of call signal
The configuration of S determines the call tone of handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, S associates the Entrance panel to
the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose between 16 different
preset bells.
For the SPRINT handsets, S sets the call ringtone, according to the following table:
Configurator
Type of bell

0
2-tone
1200 Hz
600 Hz

1
2-tone
1200 Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200 Hz
2400 Hz

BT00597-a -EN

4 sec

1 sec

Configurator number
2
3
4*
2 sec

3 sec

as
pushbutt.

6 sec

8 sec

10 sec

*Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max, after which standby mode is activated.
To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200
configured with MOD=5.

194 2 WIRE VDE system

Configurator

M=0

M=1

M=2

M=3

Tone status

All tones
enabled

Door lock tone
disabled

Call tone
disabled

All tones
disabled

Night
backlighting
status

M=4

M=5

M=6

M=7

All tones
enabled
+
backlighting
always ON

Door lock tone
disabled
+
backlighting
always ON

Call tone
disabled
+
backlighting
always ON

All tones
disabled
+
backlighting
always ON

J1 - activation of call pushbutton columns
The J1 configurator gives the possibility of managing the Call pushbuttons of the speaker
module as follows:

T - door lock relay timing
1

The M configurations gives the possibility of managing the entrance panel call and door
lock release tones . It also gives the possibility of enabling night backlighting always ON
(light sensor disabled) according to the following table:

Configurator

3
One-tone
1200 Hz

In one-family systems S=9 to configure the general call.

0=no configurator

M - enabling/disabling of call tones, door lock release tones night lighting
management always ON

J1 CONNECTED = Only the right pushbutton column is enabled
J1 DISCONNECTED = Both pushbutton columns are enabled (right + left)
J2 - additional EP power supply
Configurator J2 gives the possibility of enabling the additional power supply (1-2) of the
speaker module in the following mode :
J2 CONNECTED = Additional power supply disabled
J2 DISCONNECTED = Additional power supply enabled

TECHNICAL SHEETS

351200
CONFIGURATION - Mode 2
Mode 2 requires advanced configuration of the device, performed using a PC and
the TiSferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the
www.bticino.com). For the connection to the PC use a USB - mini USB cable. The
software gives the possibility of configuring, programming, and updating the firmware

of the speaker module.The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the
speaker module gives the possibility of performing these operations without the need to
disassemble the device.

Warning: In order to correctly send the configuration to the device, jumper (J1) must be removed. Also ensure that there are no configurators connected to the socket on the back of
the module.
Camera shooting field

(115 cm) - (96°)
(351300)
(60 cm) - (60°)
(351200)

50 cm

160 cm

(240 cm)
(135°)
(351300)

BT00597-a -EN

(105 cm)
(92°)
(351200)

2 WIRE VDE system 195

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR
Wide angle audio and video module
Description

Front view

Wide angle audio/video module for the installation of 2 WIRE colour video systems.
With Colour camera with 1/3” sensor and white LEDs for the lighting of the shooting
field. Mist prevention heating resistance. Loudspeaker and Microphone volume
adjustments. It can manage up to 98 pushbutton calls using the additional double
row pushbutton modules. It offers the possibility of opening an electrical door lock
directly connected to clamps S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA holding current
30 Ohm max) and of connecting a local door lock release pushbutton on clamps PL.
Preset for additional power supply. Fitted with front LEDs for the notification of the
operating status: door lock release, communication active, call put through, and
system busy. Integrated optic sensor for the switching on of the night backlighting.
To be completed with surround plate. The device must be configured physically or
using a PC and the TiSferaDesign software.

351300

3
4

Related items
351301
351302
351303
351311
351312
351313
351321
351322
351323
351305
351315
351325

Sfera New wide angle A/V front cover - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New wide angle A/V front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New wide angle A/V front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New wide angle A/V front cover with 1 pushbutton - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New wide angle A/V front cover with 1 pushbutton - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New wide angle A/V front cover with 1 pushbutton - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New wide angle A/V f/cover with 2 pushbuttons on double row - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New wide angle A/V f/cover with 2 pushbuttons on double row - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New wide angle A/V f/cover with 2 pushbuttons on double row - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera Robur wide angle A/V f/cover (IK 10)
Sfera Robur wide angle A/V f/cover with 1 pushbutton (IK 10)
Sfera Robur wide angle A/V f/cover with 2 pushbuttons on double row (IK 10)

Rear view

13
18

18 - 27 Vdc
15 mA
20 mA
140 mA
1/3”
F2.5 f1.8 mm
330 TV lines (horizontal)
white LED
Automatic
2:1
(-25) - (+70)°C
IP 54

Dimensional data
BT00598-a -EN

115 mm

91 mm

196 2 WIRE VDE system

15 14

Legend
1. Loudspeaker
2. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : download/upload the advanced
configuration and device firmware update
3. Microphone volume adjustment
4. LED for door status notification. GREEN ON = door open
5. LED for communication status notification. GREEN ON = active communication
6. LED for system status notification. GREEN ON = put through call
RED ON= busy system
7. Call pushbuttons
8. White LEDs for night lighting of the shooting field
9. Light sensor for automatic switching on of the night backlighting
10. Wide angle colour camera
11. Microphone
12. Loudspeaker volume adjustment
13. Connector for the connection of the 352700 inductive loop module
14. Plug-in clamps for the connection and control of the electrical door lock
(18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current 30 ohm max)
15. Plug-in clamps for the connection of the local door lock release pushbutton
16. Plug-in clamps for the connection of the local power supply and the 2 WIRE SCS BUS
17. Connector for the connection to subsequent modules
18. Configurator socket

TECHNICAL SHEETS

351300
Configuration
The device must be configured. The configuration can be performed in two ways :
Mode 1 - with physical configurator connection
Mode 2 - with PC and software TiSferaDesign

M J1 J2

0
2-tone
1200 Hz
600 Hz

1
2-tone
1200 Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200 Hz
2400 Hz

1 sec

M=0

M=1

M=2

M=3

Tone status

All tones
enabled

Door lock tone
disabled

Call tone
disabled

All tones
disabled

Backlighting status

M=4

M=5

M=6

M=7

All tones
enabled
+
backlighting
always ON

Door lock tone
disabled
+
backlighting
always ON

Call tone
disabled
+
backlighting
always ON

All tones
disabled
+
backlighting
always ON

Configurator number
2
3
4*
2 sec

3 sec

as
pushbutt.

6 sec

8 sec

10 sec

*Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max after which standby mode is activated.
To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured
with MOD=5.

BT00598-a -EN

4 sec

Configurator

J1 - activation of call pushbutton columns
The J1 configurator gives the possibility of managing the Call pushbuttons of the speaker
module as follows:

T - door lock relay timing
1

The M configurations gives the possibility of managing the entrance panel call and door
lock release tones. It also gives the possibility of enabling night backlighting always ON
(light sensor disabled) according to the following table:

Configurator

3
One-tone
1200 Hz

In one-family systems S=9 to configure the general call.

0=no configurator

M - enabling/disabling of call tones and door lock release tones, and management
of night backlighting always ON

J2 CONNECTED = Additional power supply disabled
J2 DISCONNECTED = Additional power supply enabled

2 WIRE VDE system 197

TECHNICAL SHEETS

351300
Configuration
Mode 2 requires advanced configuration of the device, performed using a PC and
the TiSferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the
www.bticino.com). For the connection to the PC use a USB - mini USB cable. The
software gives the possibility of configuring, programming, and updating the firmware

of the speaker module.The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the
speaker module gives the possibility of performing these operations without the need to
disassemble the device.

(115 cm) - (96°)
(351300)
(60 cm) - (60°)
(351200)

50 cm

160 cm

BT00598-a -EN

198 2 WIRE VDE system

(105 cm)
(92°)
(351200)
(240 cm)
(135°)
(351300)

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR
4-pushbutton module on single column
Description

352000

Front view

Additional 4-pushbutton modules arranged on single column. To be used with speaker
modules 351000 – 351100 and audio/video modules 351200 - 351300.
Connection using the appropriate multicable supplied. Backlighting of nameplates
controlled by the speaker module or the audio/video module connected.
To be completed with surround plate.
The device must not be configured.

Related items
352031
352032
352033
352041
352042
352043
352035
352045

Sfera New cover plate for 3 pushbuttons on single column - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New cover plate for 3 pushbuttons on single column - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New cover plate for 3 pushbuttons on single column - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New cover plate for 4 pushbuttons on single column - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New cover plate for 4 pushbuttons on single column - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New cover plate for 4 pushbuttons on single column - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera Robur cover plate for 3 pushbuttons on single column (IK 10)
Sfera Robur cover plate for 4 pushbuttons on single column (IK 10)

Rear view

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption with backlighting LEDs off:
Stand by absorption with backlighting LEDs on:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled):

18 - 27 Vdc
1 mA
7 mA
7 mA
(-25) – (+70)°C
IP 54

3
2

Dimensional data

Legend
1. Call pushbuttons
115 mm

2. Connector for the connection to subsequent pushbutton modules
3. Connector for the connection to previous modules

91 mm
BT00599-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 199

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR
8-pushbutton module on double column
Description

352100

Front view

Additional 8-pushbutton modules arranged on double column. To be used with
speaker modules 351000 – 351100 and audio/video modules 351200 - 351300.
Connection using the appropriate multicable supplied. Backlighting of nameplates
controlled by the speaker module or the audio/video module connected. To be
completed with surround plate.
The device must not be configured.

Related items
352161
352162
352163
352181
352182
352183
352165
352185

Sfera New cover plate for 6 pushbuttons on double column - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New cover plate for 6 pushbuttons on double column - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New cover plate for 6 pushbuttons on double column - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera New cover plate for 8 pushbuttons on double column - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New cover plate for 8 pushbuttons on double column - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New cover plate for 8 pushbuttons on double column - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera Robur cover plate for 6 pushbuttons on double column (IK 10)
Sfera Robur cover plate for 8 pushbuttons on double column (IK 10)

Rear view

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS :
Stand by absorption with backlighting LEDs off:
Stand by absorption with backlighting LEDs on:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled):

18 - 27 Vdc
1 mA
7 mA
7 mA
(-25) – (+70)°C
IP 54

3
2

Dimensional data

Legend
1. Call pushbuttons
115 mm

2. Connector for the connection to subsequent pushbutton modules
3. Connector for the connection to previous modules

91 mm
BT00600-a -EN

200 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR
Nameplate module
Description

352200
Front view

Nameplate module normally used for displaying the house number or other notifications
(e.g. Legend for calls using digital pushbutton panels, opening/closing times, etc.).
Connection using the appropriate multicable supplied. Night backlighting controlled by
the speaker module or the audio/video module connected.
To be completed with surround plate.
The device must not be configured.

Related items
352201
352202
352203
352205

Sfera New nameplate front cover - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New nameplate front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New nameplate front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera Robur nameplate front cover (IK 10)

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption with backlighting LEDs off:
Stand by absorption with backlighting LEDs on:
Operating temperature:
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled):

18 - 27 Vdc
0 mA
6 mA
(-25) – (+70)°C
IP 54

Rear view

3
2

Dimensional data

Legend
1. Area used for entering information
115 mm

2. Connector for the connection to subsequent modules
3. Connector for the connection to previous modules

BT00601-a -EN

91 mm

2 WIRE VDE system 201

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR
N&D and wide angle camera module
Description

352400

Front view

Night & Day and wide angle camera module for the installation of colour video systems.
Fitted with 1/3” sensor with N&D function and automatic removal of the IR filter.
IR LED for the lighting of the field of view. Mist prevention heating resistance.
Automatic brightness adjustment. Connection to the speaker module (351100) using the
multicable supplied. To be completed with surround plate.

The device must not be configured.The device must not be configured.

4
Related items
352401
352402
352403
352405

Sfera New front cover for N&D and wide angle camera - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New front cover for N&D and wide angle camera - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New front cover for N&D and wide angle camera - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera Robur front cover for N&D and wide angle camera (IK 10)

3
Rear view

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Colour sensor:
Lens:
Resolution:
Illumination of the viewing field:
Brightness adjustment:
Interlace:
N&D function with automatic IR filter removal:
Mist prevention heating resistance:
Operating temperature:
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled):

18 - 27 Vdc
20 mA
115 mA
1/3”
F2.5 f1.85 mm
330 TV lines (horizontal)
LED IR
automatic
2:1
(-25) - (+70)°C
IP 54

Dimensional data

Legend
1. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : device firmware update
115 mm

2. Night & Day camera
3. Light sensor
4. IR LED for night lighting of the field of view
5. Connector for the connection of the speaker module 351100

BT00602-a -EN

202 2 WIRE VDE system

91 mm

TECHNICAL SHEETS

352400
Connection to the PC
It is possible to update the device Firmware using a PC and the TiSferaDesign software
(which can be downloaded free of charge from the www.bticino.com). For the connection
to the PC use a USB - mini USB cable.

The software gives the possibility of updating the firmware of the speaker module.
The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the speaker module gives the
possibility of performing these operations without the need to disassemble the device.

Camera shooting field

( 115 cm) - (96°)
50 cm

160 cm
(240 cm) - (135°)

BT00602-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 203

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR
Display module
Description

352500
Front view

Graphic display module to be used with speaker module 351100 or with audio/video
modules 351200 – 351300 (connection using the multicable supplied). It can operate in
two modes: call from address book, or digital call. The call from the address book gives the
possibilityofsendingthecall byscrollingonthe displaythenames associatedtotheresidents.
It is possible to store up to 4000 residents names. Using the keypad module item 353000
it is also possible to directly call the apartment by entering the number corresponding
to the resident. The digital call is also performed using the keypad module item 353000
by entering the numerical code. It is recommended that one or more nameplate
modules, item 352200, are installed at the side of the pushbutton panel to display the
correspondence between the numerical codes and the names of the users. It is possible
to program the names in the address book in two different ways: manual inclusion using
the pushbuttons of the display module or inclusion using a PC with the TiSferaDesign
software installed, by downloading the file to the display module (RECOMMENDED).
System power supply cuts do NOT cause the loss of memory data. To be completed with
surround plate.

3
4
5
6

The device must not be configured.
Related items
352501
352502
352503
352505

Rear view

Sfera New display front cover - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New display front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New display front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera Robur display front cover (IK 09)

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Display type:
FSTN
Display resolution:
Operating temperature:
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled):

18 - 27 Vdc
40 mA
50 mA
Negative transflective
160 x 240
(-25) – (+70)°C
IP 54

Dimensional data

8
7

Legend
1. Graphic display
115 mm

2. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : programming of residents address
book and device firmware update
3. Residents names scroll pushbutton (UP)
4. Residents names scroll pushbutton (DOWN)
5. Confirmation pushbutton – send call (OK)

BT00603-a -EN

204 2 WIRE VDE system

91 mm

6. Quick scroll pushbutton
7. Connector for the connection to subsequent modules
8. Connector for the connection to previous modules

TECHNICAL SHEETS

352500
Connection to the PC
It is possible to program the residents address book and update the device Firmware using
a PC and the TiSferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the
www.bticino.com).
For the Connection to the PC, use a USB - mini USB cable.

The software gives the possibility of updating the device and download the residents
address book.The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the speaker module
gives the possibility of performing these operations without the need to disassemble the
device.

BT00603-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 205

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR
Inductive loop and control speech synthesis module
Description

Front view

Inductive loop and control speech synthesis module, to be used with the 351100
speaker module or with audio/video modules 351200 - 351300, to enable use by
people wearing hearing aids (fitted with T selector). It is connected to the speaker
module using the appropriate multicable supplied. To be completed with surround
plate. The device can be configured either physically or using the PC and the
TiSferaDesign software.

352700

Related items
352701
352702
352703
352705

front cover for the Sfera New inductive loop and control speech synthesis Allmetal (IK 08)
front cover for the Sfera New inductive loop and control speech synthesis Allwhite (IK 08)
front cover for the Sfera New inductive loop and control speech synthesis Allstreet (IK 08)
front cover for the Sfera Robur inductive loop and control speech synthesis
(IK 10)

Rear view

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled):

18 – 27 Vdc
18 mA
60 mA
(-25) – (+70) °C
IP 54

Legend

Dimensional data

1. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : configuration and device firmware
update

115 mm

2. Loudspeaker
3. Loudspeaker volume adjustment
4. Configurator socket
5. Plug-in clamps for the connection of the local power supply and the 2 WIRE SCS BUS
91 mm

BT00604-a -EN

206 2 WIRE VDE system

6. Connector for the connection of the speaker module

TECHNICAL SHEETS

352700
Configuration
The device must be configured.
The configuration can be performed in two ways:
Mode 1 - with physical configurator connection
Mode 2 - with PC and software TiSferaDesign

D
L

Mode 1
Mode 1 requires the physical connection of the configurators to their sockets:
The configurator connected to the L socket defines the language for the control speech
synthesis.
L- Selection of the speech synthesis language:
The configurator connected to the L socket defines the language for the control speech
synthesis as for the following table:
Configurator

Language

none

default language (English)

English

French

Italian

Spanish

German

Flemish

Portuguese

DL - Selection of the default speech synthesis language:
The configurator connected to the DL socket defines the default language for the control
speech synthesis. The default language is selected from the preloaded language pack, as
for the following table:
Language

none

1st language of the preloaded language pack

2nd language of the preloaded language pack

3rd language of the preloaded language pack

4th language of the preloaded language pack

5th language of the preloaded language pack

6th language of the preloaded language pack

7th language of the preloaded language pack

8th language of the preloaded language pack

9th language of the preloaded language pack

10th language of the preloaded language pack

M - Operating mode:
The configurator connected to the M socket sets the operating mode of the device as
indicated below:

BT00604-a -EN

Configurator

M = O (no configurator) - Inductive loop and control speech synthesis both enabled
M = 1 - Inductive loop enable, control speech synthesis disabled

2 WIRE VDE system 207

TECHNICAL SHEETS

352700
Mode 2
Mode 2 requires advanced configuration of the device, performed using a PC
and the TisferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the
www.bticino.com). For the connection to the PC, use a USB - mini USB cable. The
software gives the possibility of configuring, programming, and updating the firmware
of the speaker module. The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the
speaker module gives the possibility of performing these operations without the need
to disassemble the device.

Notes on the use of the inductive loop
Switch the selector of the acoustic device to the T position

2535 c
m
BT00604-a -EN

To ensure correct magnetic coupling between the device and the acoustic device, we
recommend a position in front of the device, at a distance of 25-35 cm.
It is reminded that the presence of metal and background noise generated by
electric/electronic devices (e.g. computer) may compromise the performance and
the quality of the coupling device.

208 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR
Keypad module
Description

353000
Front view

Door lock release keypad module. It is fitted with relay with contacts (C – NC – NO) and
clamps (CP- P1 – P2) for the connection of a local door lock release pushbutton.
The numerical code for the opening of the door lock can be programmed using the
keypad itself, or using a PC after downloading the module programming file. It also has a
programming reset pushbutton and LEDS for the visual notification of the access status.
Night backlighting with LEDs. To be completed with surround plate. It is connected to the
other modules using the appropriate multicable supplied. The device may also be used as
a stand alone unit with independent power supply and operation.
Configuration performed using physical configurators, or a PC with the TiSferaDesign
software installed.

2
8

Related items
353001
353002
353003
353005

4
5

Sfera New keypad front cover - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New keypad front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New keypad front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera Robur keypad front cover (IK 09)
Rear view

18 - 27 Vdc
10 mA
25 mA
45 mA
(-25) – (+70) °C
IP 54

12
11

Dimensional data

Legend
1. LEDs for night backlighting
115 mm

2. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : download/upload the
configuration and device firmware update
3. RESET pushbutton
LED ON = access denied

5. Green LED for access status notification Green

LED ON = access granted

6. Cancel pushbutton (C)
7. Pushbutton for the selection of the door lock release code
8. Numeric keypad used for entering the codes
9. Plug-in clamps (CP – P1 P2) for connection of the additional local pushbutton

BT00605-a -EN

91 mm

4. Red LED for access status notification Red

10. Plug-in clamps (C – NC – NO) for local relay contacts and connection to the 2 WIRE
SCS BUS
11. Connector for the connection to subsequent modules
12. Connector for the connection to previous modules
13. Configurator socket

2 WIRE VDE system 209

TECHNICAL SHEETS

353000
Configuration
The configuration of the device is different depending on the type of installation:
• Device installation inside a SFERA NEW pushbutton panel in 2 WIRE SCS
systems.
• installation as STAND ALONE device

In both cases, the configuration can be performed in two ways:
• Mode 1 - with physical configurator connection
• Mode 2 - with PC and software TiSferaDesign

Mode 1

Mode 2

Mode 1 requires the physical connection of the configurators to their sockets.

Mode 2 requires advanced configuration of the device, performed using a PC and
the TisferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the
www.bticino.com).
For the connection to the PC use a USB - mini USB cable. The software gives the possibility
of configuring, programming, and updating the firmware of the speaker module.
The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the speaker module gives the
possibility of performing these operations without the need to disassemble the device.

PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION FOR INSTALLATION WITH A SFERA NEW EP:
A + B + C - Not used
M - Operating mode - Not used
T -local relay time delay – NOT USED
(the time delay of the local relay is set by the T configurator connected to the speaker
module or to the audio video module used).

PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION IN STAND ALONE INSTALLATION:
A + B + C - progressive address of the device
The configurators connected to the A B C sockets assign a progressive address to the
device inside the system (range 000 – 999).
Example : A+B+C = 003 - device 003 of the system.
M - Operating mode - Not used
BT00605-a -EN

T – local relay time delay
The configurator connected to T sets the relay closing time delay as shown in the
following table:
Configurator
Contact closing
time

0 = no
configurator

4’’

1’’

10’’ 20’’ 40’’

210 2 WIRE VDE system

1’

1.5’

3’

TECHNICAL SHEETS

353000
Wiring diagram- Installation with SFERA NEW EP
Example of installation of the keypad module inside a 2 WIRE SFERA NEW pushbutton panel with SCS BUS NOT CONNECTED to the keypad module
2 WIRE A/V module

Configure as indicated on the
device technical sheet
BUS TK - 2-WIRE SCS
Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA
holding current 30 Ohm max

A + B + C - DO NOT CONFIGURE
M - DO NOT CONFIGURE
T - DO NOT CONFIGURE

Keypad module 353000

Wiring diagram- STAND ALONE installation
Example of STAND ALONE installation connection with the SCS BUS connected to the keypad module.

Keypad module 353000
A + B + C = 003
(SCS device No. 3)
M - DO NOT CONFIGURE
T = 2 (contact closed for 10”)

SCS BUS

BT00605-a-EN

Contact load:
8 A 30 Vdc
8 A 30 Vac cos@ 1
3.5 A 30 Vac cos@ 0.4

2 WIRE VDE system 211

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR
Badge reader module
Description

353200
Front view

RFID badge reader module for the release of the door lock by swiping
the badge. It manages up to 20000 badges. It’s fitted with relay contacts
(C – NO - NC) and clamps (CP - P1 - P2) for the connection of a local door release pushbutton.
The badge for the release of the door lock can be programmed from the module itself,
or using a PC after downloading the module programming file.
It also has a programming reset pushbutton and LEDS for the visual notification of the
access status. Night backlighting a LEDs. To be completed with surround plate. It is
connected to the other modules using the appropriate multicable supplied. The device
may also be used as a stand alone unit with independent power supply and operation.
Configuration performed using physical configurators, or a PC with the TiSferaDesign
software installed.

1 2

3
5
4

Related items
353201
353202
353203
353205
348200
348201
348202
348203
348204
348205
348206

Sfera New badge reader front cover - Allmetal (IK 08)
Sfera New badge reader front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
Sfera New badge reader front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
Sfera Robur badge reader front cover (IK 09)
badge - black
badge - red
badge - green
badge - blue
badge - orange
badge - grey
badge - yellow

Rear view

9
8

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption
(with backlighting LEDs off):
Stand by absorption
(with backlighting LEDs on):
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled):

18 – 27 Vdc

75 mA
85 mA
105 mA
(-25) – (+70) °C
IP 54

Legend
1. RESET pushbutton
2. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : programming and device
firmware update
3. Red LED for access status notification.

Red LED ON = access denied

4. Green LED for access status notification. Green LED ON = access granted

Dimensional data

5. Antenna
6. Plug-in clamps (CP - P1 - P2) for the connection of an additional pushbutton and
tamper

115 mm
BT00606-a -EN

7. Plug-in clamps (C – NC – NO) for local relay contacts and connection to the 2 WIRE
SCS BUS
8. Connector for the connection to subsequent modules
91 mm

212 2 WIRE VDE system

9. Connector for the connection to previous modules
10. Configurator socket

TECHNICAL SHEETS

353200
Configuration
The configuration of the device is different depending on the type of installation:
- device installation inside a SFERA NEW pushbutton panel in 2 WIRE SCS systems,
- installation as STAND ALONE device.

In both cases, The configuration can be performed in two ways:
Mode 1 - with physical configurator connection
Mode 2 - with PC and software TiSferaDesign

Mode 1
Mode 1 requires the physical connection of the configurators to their sockets.

Physical configuration in stand alone installation:

Physical configuration for installation with a sfera new ep:

A + B + C - NOT USED
M - operating mode, badges management
The configurator connected to the M socket sets the badges management mode as
indicated below:
M = 0 - management of badges with manager MASTER ONLY
The MANAGER MASTER badges (max. 20) are used both for the management of
PASSEPARTOUT badges (max. 100) and for the management of the RESIDENTS max
(max. 5) of each apartment.
M = 1 - badges management with APARTMENT MASTER
The MANAGER MASTER badges (max. 20) directly manage the PASSPARTOUT badges
(max. 100) and the APARTMENT MASTER badges (max. 4000); the APARTMENT MASTER
badges manage the RESIDENTS badges (max. 5) of the corresponding apartment.
T -local relay time delay – NOT USED
(the time delay of the local relay is set by the T configurator connected to the speaker
module or audio video module used).

M - operating mode, badges management
The configurator connected to the M socket sets the badges management mode as
indicated below:
M = 0 - management of badges with MANAGER MASTER ONLY
The MANAGER MASTER badges (max. 20) are used both for the management of
PASSEPARTOUT badges (MAX. 100) and for the management of the RESIDENTS badges
(max. 5) of each apartment.
M = 1 - badges management with APARTMENT MASTER
The MANAGER MASTER badges (max. 20) directly manage the
PASSPARTOUT badges (max. 100) and the APARTMENT MASTER badges
(max. 4000); the APARTMENT MASTER badges manage the RESIDENTS badges (max. 5)
of the corresponding apartment.

Configurator
Contact closing
time

0 none

4”

1”

10”

20”

40”

1’

1.5’

3’

BT00606-a -EN

T – local relay time delay
The configurator connected to T sets the relay closing time delay as shown in the
following table:

2 WIRE VDE system 213

TECHNICAL SHEETS

353200
Mode 2
Mode 2 requires advanced configuration of the device, performed using a PC and the
TisferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the www.bticino.com).
For the connection to the PC use a USB - mini USB cable. The software gives the
possibility of configuring, programming, and updating the firmware of the speaker
module. The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the speaker module
gives the possibility of performing these operations without the need to disassemble
the device.

Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram- Installation with SFERA NEW EP
Example of installation of the RFID module inside a 2 WIRE SFERA NEW pushbutton panel with SCS BUS NOT CONNECTED to the RFID module
2 WIRE A/V module

Configure as indicated on the
device technical sheet
BUS TK - 2-WIRE SCS

WARNING: Irrespective of the position of the SFERA NEW
modules, the RFID module must the FIRST DEVICE connected
to the advanced speaker module or to the audio/video module.
Any other modules (e.g. pushbuttons) must be connected after
the RFID module.

Electrical door lock
18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA holding
current 30 Ohm max

Pushbutton
module
BT00606-a-EN

214 2 WIRE VDE system

A + B + C - DO NOT CONFIGURE
M - DO NOT CONFIGURE
T - DO NOT CONFIGURE
NOTE: the M = 0 configuration (no configurator
connected), only enables management of RESIDENTS badges.
To add and/or delete residents badges, the badge programmed
as MANAGER MASTER badge is required.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

353200
Wiring diagram- STAND ALONE installation
Example of STAND ALONE installation connection with the SCS BUS connected to the RFID module.

Keypad module 353200
A + B + C = 003
(SCS device No. 3)
M - DO NOT CONFIGURE
T = 2 (contact closed for 10”)
Contact load:
8 A 30 Vdc
8 A 30 Vac cos@ 1
3.5 A 30 Vac cos@ 0.4
SCS BUS

NOTE: The M = 1 configuration also gives the possibility of
managing APARTMENT MASTER badges. To add and/or delete
residents badges, the badge programmed as APARTMENT
MASTER badge is required.

BT00606-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 215

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR
Fingerprint reader module
Description

353300
Front view

Fingerprint reader module for the release of the door lock. It’s fitted with relay contacts
(C – NO - NC) and clamps (CP - P1 - P2) for the connection of a local door release pushbutton.
It also has a programming reset pushbutton and LEDS for the visual notification of
the access status. To be completed with surround plate. It is connected to the other
modules using the appropriate multicable supplied. The device may also be used as a
stand alone unit with independent power supply and operation.
Configuration performed using physical configurators, or a PC with the TiSferaDesign
software installed.

3
4

Related items
353301
353302
353303
353305

Sfera New fingerprint reader front cover - Allmetal (IK 06)
Sfera New fingerprint reader front cover - Allwhite (IK 06)
Sfera New fingerprint reader front cover - Allstreet (IK 06)
Sfera Robur fingerprint reader front cover (IK 06)

Rear view

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled):

18 – 27 Vdc
30 mA
80 mA
(-25) – (+70) °C
IP 54

8
7

6
Dimensional data

Legend
1. Green LED for access status notification. LED ON = access granted
115 mm

2. Red LED for access status notification.

LED ON = access denied

3. Digital fingerprint reader sensor
4. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC: download/upload the configuration
and device firmware update
5. Plug-in clamps (CP – P1 P2) for connection of the additional local pushbutton
91 mm
BT00607-a -EN

216 2 WIRE VDE system

6. Plug-in clamps (C – NC – NO) for local relay contacts and connection to the 2 WIRE
SCS BUS
7. Connector for the connection to subsequent modules
8. Connector for the connection to previous modules
9. Configurator socket

TECHNICAL SHEETS

353300
Configuration
The configuration of the device is different depending on the type of installation:
- device installation inside a SFERA NEW pushbutton panel in 2 WIRE SCS systems,
- installation as STAND ALONE device.

In both cases, the configuration can be performed in two ways :
Mode 1 - with physical configurator connection
Mode 2 - with PC and software TiSferaDesign

PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION FOR INSTALLATION WITH A SFERA NEW EP:

PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION IN STAND ALONE INSTALLATION:

A + B + C - NOT USED
M - operating mode, fingerprint management
The configurator connected to the M socket sets the fingerprint management mode as
indicated below:
M = 0 - management of fingerprint with manager MASTER ONLY
The MANAGER MASTER fingerprints (max. 5) are used both for the management of
PASSEPARTOUT fingerprints (MAX. 30) and for the management of the RESIDENTS
fingerprints (max. 5) of each apartment.
M = 1 - fingerprint management with APARTMENT MASTER
The MANAGER MASTER fingerprints (max. 5) directly manage the PASSEPARTOUT
fingerprints (max. 30) and the APARTMENT MASTER fingerprints (max. 30); the
APARTMENT MASTER fingerprints manage the RESIDENTS fingerprints (max. 5) of the
corresponding apartment.
T - local relay time delay – NOT USED
(the time delay of the local relay is set by the T configurator connected to the speaker
module or audio video module used).

A + B + C - progressive address of the device
The configurators connected to the A B C sockets assign a progressive address to the
device inside the system (range 000 – 999).
Example: A+B+C = 003 – device 003 of the system.
M - operating mode, fingerprint management
The configurator connected to the M socket sets the fingerprint management mode as
indicated below:
M = 0 - management of fingerprint with MANAGER MASTER ONLY
The MANAGER MASTER fingerprints (max. 5) are used both for the management of
PASSEPARTOUT fingerprints (MAX. 30) and for the management of the RESIDENTS
fingerprints (max. 5) of each apartment.
M = 1 - fingerprint management with APARTMENT MASTER
The MANAGER MASTER fingerprints (max. 5) directly manage the PASSEPARTOUT
fingerprints (max. 30) and the APARTMENT MASTER fingerprints (max. 30); the
APARTMENT MASTER fingerprints manage the RESIDENTS fingerprints (max. 5) of the
corresponding apartment.

Configurator
Contact closing
time

0 none

4”

1”

10”

20”

40”

1’

1.5’

3’

BT00607-a -EN

T – local relay time delay
The configurator connected to T sets the relay closing time delay as shown in the
following table:

2 WIRE VDE system 217

TECHNICAL SHEETS

353300
Mode 2
Mode 2 requires advanced configuration of the device, performed using a PC and the
TisferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the www.bticino.com).
For the connection to the PC use a USB - mini USB cable. The software gives the possibility
of configuring, programming, and updating the firmware of the speaker module.
The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the speaker module gives the
possibility of performing these operations without the need to disassemble the device.

Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagram - Installation with SFERA NEW EP
Example of installation of the fingerprint module inside a 2 WIRE SFERA NEW pushbutton panel with SCS BUS NOT CONNECTED to the fingerprint module

Configure as indicated on the
device technical sheet
BUS TK - 2-WIRE SCS

WARNING: Irrespective of the position of the SFERA NEW
modules, the fingerprint module must the FIRST DEVICE
connected to the advanced speaker module or to the audio/
video module. Any other modules (e.g. pushbuttons) must be
connected after the fingerprint module.

Electrical door lock
18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA holding
current 30 Ohm max

Pushbutton
module
BT00607-a -EN

A + B + C - DO NOT CONFIGURE
M - DO NOT CONFIGURE
T - DO NOT CONFIGURE

Fingerprint module 353300

218 2 WIRE VDE system

NOTE: the M = 0 configuration (no configurator connected),
only enables management of RESIDENTS fingerprints.
To add and/or delete residents fingerprints, the fingerprint
programmed as MANAGER MASTER fingerprint is required.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

353300
Wiring diagram- STAND ALONE installation
Example of STAND ALONE installation connection with the SCS BUS connected to the fingerprint module.

Keypad module 353300
A + B + C = 003
((SCS device No. 3)
M - DO NOT CONFIGURE
T = 2 (contact closed for 10”)
Contact load:
8 A 30 Vdc
8 A 30 Vac cos@ 1
3.5 A 30 Vac cos@ 0,4
BUS SCS

NOTE: The M = 1 configuration also gives the possibility of
managing APARTMENT MASTER fingerprints. To add and/or
delete residents fingerprints, the fingerprint programmed as
APARTMENT MASTER fingerprint is required.

BT00607-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 219

TECHNICAL SHEETS

353300
Functional notes
The function of the fingerprint scanner is to read and analyse the image of the digital
fingerprint and compare it with a reference model previously programmed in the device.
If the comparison is positive, the door lock release is enabled, or an auxiliary system is
activated.

The device performs the reading of the 3rd phalange of your finger. It is therefore
necessary that the finger is place correctly in the specific position on the reader and
moved downwards across the sensor at the correct speed.

For correct operation we recommend compliance with the following indications:

What you must NOT do:

- your finger must be placed straight and flat on the reader at the point indicated;

- Do NOT place the 3rd phalange in a higher position in relation to the reference point
on the reader

- Do NOT position the finger on the right or left half of the reader, tilted, or in any way
with the phalange not flat against the finger recess of the reader.

- Do NOT position the finger at a too wide angle in relation to the reader finger recess.

BT00607-a -EN

220 2 WIRE VDE system

- Do NOT move the finger away before the device has completed the acquisition,
confirmed by the switching off of the luminous sensor window.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

AXOLUTE Outdoor
entrance panel

349140

Description
Axolute outdoor entrance panel suitable for connection to the 2-WIRE system BUS or to
be used in BTicino IP systems. It’s fitted with capacitive soft touch control backlit keypad,
motorised colour camera (which swivelling operation can be controlled from the preset
handsets), colour display with home page that can be fully customised by the installer,
and transponder reader for the release of the door lock, which may also be activated
using a numeric code for residents. Module to be completed with flush mounted box
and surround plate. Programming, residents directory, and the configuration are
completed using the appropriate software supplied with the product.

Front view

1
2

Related items
339313 (Steel flush mounted box with tearing protection)
331130 (SFERA plastic flush mounted box)
339213 (Surround plate + frame, steel finish)
339223 (Surround plate + frame, brass finish)

4
5
6

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
Connections:

Protection index:
PI against mechanical impact:

Rear view

18 – 27 Vdc
220 mA
420 mA
(-25)-(+70)°C
2-WIRE SCS BUS
Ethernet 10/100 Mbit/sec
IP54
IK07

12
11
10
9

Dimensional data
104 mm

50 mm

84 mm

7
8

35,5 mm

253 mm

300 mm

Legend
1. Loudspeakers
2. Colour camera that can be swivelled

Flush mounted box

3. LCD colour display

Electric module
27,5
mm

139 mm

30 mm

4. Capacitive alphanumeric keypad: to search for the extension and for sending the
call, as well as for enabling the installer to complete the programming procedure
6. Microphone

355 mm

330 mm

7. Ethernet connector: for connection to the IP BTicino system and for programming
and firmware update from PC
8. Cable fastener

BT00608-a -EN

5. Transponder reader: to open the door lock using the transponder

9. Additional power supply connection clamps
10. Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire SCS BUS
Steel surround plate + frame
Protrusion from the wall:
11 mm

Brass surround plate + frame
Protrusion from the wall:
13.5 mm

11. Mini-USB connector: for PC connection, for programming or firmware update
12. Configurator socket

2 WIRE VDE system 221

TECHNICAL SHEETS

349140
Configuration
The device can be configured in three different modes:
1) Physical connection fo the configurators to their sockets:
P - entrance panel number
The configurator connected to P socket assigns an identification number within the
system to the EP. The numbering of the EP must always start from P=0.
The EP configured with P=0 must be the main one.
S - selection of the ring tone to send to the Handset and general call
When a call is received: S=0 (RING TONE 1 - Default)
S=1 (RING TONE 2)
S=2 (RING TONE 3)
S=3 (RING TONE 4)
S=9 (GENERAL CALL TO ALL THE HANDSETS)
2) Directly from the keypad of the electronic module:
Using the installer menu (Password protected function)

Configuration

Configuration of the
SCS address of the
entrance panel

WARNING: the presence of physical configurators in the configurator sockets
WILL PREVENT keypad configuration.

BT00608-a -EN

222 2 WIRE VDE system

Entrance panel
address

Ring tone selection /
general call

TECHNICAL SHEETS

349140
Configuration
3) Using the TiAxoluteOutdoor Software supplied:
For the connection to the PC use an USB-mini cable or an Ethernet cable (cross cable).
The dedicated application can be used for configuration, programming, device Firmware
update, fill the residents list, save all information, and download to the device.

USB connection

BUS
Ethernet connection

Cross cable

If the Axolute EP is installed and has Ethernet connection, remote connection is also possible.
WARNING: in order for the communication to take place, the EP must be powered and not physically configured.

BT00608-a-EN

BUS

2 WIRE VDE system 223

TECHNICAL SHEETS

349140
Wiring diagrams
2-WIRE SCS BUS connection
349140

230 Vac

346000

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

346830
or
F441

OUT4

OUT

1 2 PL S+ S-

346230

346230
or
346260

346020
35,

PRI: 220 - 240V~
175A
50/60
165m z
H
127Vdc
600 A
2:
m

3 7

IN1

BUS 2 1

IN2

IN3

IN4

SCS

BUS

230 Vac

OPTIONAL

NOTE (*): needed for lines (SCS power supply - EP) > 50 m (with cable item 336904)

IP Ethernet connection
349140

230 Vac
12 Vac 1 A

1 2 PL S+ S-

346230

346000

346230
or
346260

346020
35,

PRI: 220 - 240V~
175A
50/60
165m z
H
127Vdc
600 A
2:
m

3 7

SWITCH C9455

BUS 2 1
230 Vac

BT00608-a-EN

'&,Q

BUS

NOTE (*): needed for lines (SCS power supply - EP) > 50 m (with cable item 336904)

224 2 WIRE VDE system

2
OPTIONAL

TECHNICAL SHEETS

LINEA 2000
Audio entrance panel

342911 - 342921
342931 - 342941

Description
2 WIRE system audio pushbutton panel.
Wall mounted. Green LED backlit name plate.
One to four calls version available.
1
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 - 27 Vdc
30 mA
65 mA
(-25) - (+70)°C

Dimensional data

3
4

98 mm

5
Legend

176
mm

160

÷165

31
mm

1.
2.
3.
4.

Loudspeaker
Configurator housing
Call keys
JUMPER for exclusion of the call tone on the entrance panel (can be enabled
removing the jumper)
5. Microphone
6. Terminals for BUS and door lock connection: the module allows to control an
electric door lock directly connected to the S+ S- terminals (18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current 30 Ohm max)
7. Microphone and loudspeaker volume adjustment
T – Door lock control time delay

Configuration

Configurator number

The device must be configured (only phisically) as follows:

0= No
configurator

as
6 sec. 8 sec. 10 sec.
pushbutt.
* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max., after which standby mode is activated.
To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with
MOD=5.

1 sec. 2 sec.

3 sec.

S - type of call signal
The configuration of S determines the call tone of SPRINT handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
Table for SPRINT handset call signal
Configurator
Type of bell

0
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

1
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

3
One-tone
1200Hz

BT00609-a -EN

N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets.

4 sec.

2 WIRE VDE system 225

TECHNICAL SHEETS

LINEA 2000 METAL
Audio entrance panel

342971 - 342972

Description
2 WIRE system audio pushbutton panel with Zamak front cover.
Wall mounted. Blue LED backlit name plate
One and two-family version available.

Technical data

Power supply from SCS BUS: 18-27 Vdc
Stand by absorption:
30 mA
Max. operating absorption: 65 mA
Operating temperature:
(-25)-(+70)°C
PI against mechanical impact: IK10

3
4

Dimensional data

106

mm
5
Legend

185
mm

cm
160 ÷ 165

35
mm

1. Loudspeaker
2. Configurator housing
3. JUMPER for exclusion of the call tone on the entrance panel
(can be enabled removing the jumper)
4. Call keys
5. Microphone
6. Terminals for BUS and door lock connection: the module allows to control an
electric door lock directly connected to the S+ S- terminals (18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current 30 Ohm max)
7. Microphone and loudspeaker volume adjustment
T – Door lock control time delay

Configuration
The device must be configured (only phisically) as follows:
P - entrance panel number
The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
inside the system.
The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0. The entrance panel
configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
BT00610-a -EN

N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets.

configurator number
0= No
configurator

as
6 sec. 8 sec. 10 sec.
pushbutt.
* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max, after which standby mode is activated.
To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with
MOD=5.
4 sec.

1 sec. 2 sec.

3 sec.

0
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

1
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

3
One-tone
1200Hz

226 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

LINEA 2000
B/W entrance panel

342951 - 342961

Description

2 WIRE black and white video pushbutton panel.
Wall mounted. Green LED backlit name plate.
Camera adjustable by +/- 15° on both axes during installation.
One and two-family version available.

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 - 27 Vdc
30 mA
270 mA
(-25) - (+70)°C

3
9
8

Dimensional data

98 mm
6
Legend

176
mm

160

÷165

31
mm
Configuration
The device must be configured (only phisically) as follows:
P - entrance panel number
The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
inside the system.
The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0. The entrance panel
configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.

T – Door lock control time delay
configurator number
0= No
configurator

1 sec. 2 sec.

3 sec.

0
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

1
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

3
One-tone
1200Hz

BT00611-a -EN

N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets.

1 - IR LED for night lighting of the field of view
2 - B/W camera with camera slant adjustment horizontally and vertically by ±15°
3 - Loudspeaker
4 - Configurator socket
5 - Call keys
6 - Microphone
7 - Door lock release sound enable/disable
8 - Clamps for BUS connection, door lock and local pushbutton: the module allows
to control an electric door lock directly connected to the clamps S+ S- (18 V 4 A
impulsive - 250 mA holding current 30 Ohm max)
9 - Microphone and loudspeaker volume adjustment

2 WIRE VDE system 227

TECHNICAL SHEETS

LINEA 2000 METAL
B/W entrance panel

342981 - 342982

Description

2 WIRE black and white video pushbutton panel with Zamak front cover.
Wall mounted. Blue LED backlit name plate
One and two-family version available.

Technical data

9
10
11
4

Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 - 27 Vdc
Stand by absorption:
30 mA
Max. operating absorption: 270 mA
Operating temperature:
(-25) - (+70)°C
PI against mechanical impact: IK07

7
6
12

Dimensional data

106

2
1

mm
Legend

185
mm

cm
160 – 165

35
mm

N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets.

228 2 WIRE VDE system

1 - Call keys
2 - Configurator socket
3 - Microphone
4 - Loudspeaker
5 - B/W camera with camera slant adjustment horizontally and vertically by ±15°
6 - Clamps for BUS connection and door lock: the module allows to control an
electric door lock directly connected to the clamps S+ S- (18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current 30 Ohm max)
7 - Microphone and loudspeaker volume adjustment
8 - White LEDs for night lighting of the field of view
9 - Green LED: door open notification
10 - Green LED: communication active notification
11 - System status LED: flashing green = put through call

flashing red = busy system notification
12 - Door lock opening sound enable/disable micro-switch
T – Door lock control time delay
configurator number
0= No
1
2
configurator
4 sec.

1 sec. 2 sec.

as
3 sec. pushbutt. 6 sec.

8 sec. 10 sec.

* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max, after which standby mode is activated.

To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with
MOD=5.
S - type of call signal
The configuration of S determines the call tone of SPRINT handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
Table for SPRINT handset call signal

Configurator
Type of bell

0
1
2
3
2-tone
2-tone
2-tone
One-tone
1200Hz
1200Hz
1200Hz
1200Hz
600Hz
0 Hz
2400Hz
For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the S configurator associates the Entrance
panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose between 16 different
bells. In one-family systems, S=9 configures the general call and the handsets ring, the same
as with the S=0.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Wall mounted
LINEA 2000 METAL entrance panel

342991 - 342992

Description

Wall mounted 2-wire pushbutton panel with Zamak front cover, colour camera, and
night viewing white LED light. One and two-family version available.
The camera can be swivelled by +/-15°, both horizontally and vertically.
It provides the possibility of opening an electrical door lock connected directly to clamps
S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current). Blue LED backlit name plate

Related items

346250 (gate release relay module)

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
PI against mechanical impact:

18 - 27 Vdc
20 mA
240 mA
(-25) - (+70)°C
IK07

Dimensional data

6
Legend

106
mm

185
mm

160 ÷ 165
cm

1 - White LEDs for night lighting
2 - Colour camera with camera slant adjustment horizontally and vertically by ±15°
3 - Loudspeaker
4 - Configurator socket
5 - Call keys
6 - Microphone
7 - Clamps for BUS and door lock connection: the module allows to control an electric
door lock directly connected to the clamps S+ S- (18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA
holding current 30 Ohm max)
8 - Microphone and loudspeaker volume adjustment

35
mm

BT00613-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 229

TECHNICAL SHEETS

342991 - 342992
Configuration
The device must be configured as follows:
P - entrance panel number
The configurator in seat P of the speaker module assigns to it a recognition number
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons, and the audio
or video handsets.
In common entrance panels made using pushbutton modules, 1 must be inserted in N of
the speaker module. In secondary entrance panels, the number of the first riser handset
must be inserted in N.

T - door lock relay timing
configurator number
0= No
configurator
4 sec.

1 sec. 2 sec.

3 sec.

as
6 sec.
pushbutt.

8 sec. 10 sec.

S - type of call signal
The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
Table for SPRINT handset call signal
Configurator
Type of bell

0
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

1
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

3
One-tone
1200Hz

BT00613-a -EN

230 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

LINEA 100
Digital call pushbutton panel
Description

343100
Front view

2 WIRE AUDIO digital call pushbutton panel for wall mounted installation. The device
consists in a pushbutton panel with 16 keys and a digital display for the display of the
operating status. Through the recognition of previously saved numerical (SCS addresses)
or alphanumerical codes (logic addresses), it can be used to call handsets, and to give
residents the possibility of opening the door lock using a dedicated numerical code.
The pushbutton panel can manage up to 4000 handset addresses (from 0 to 3999),
and the direct call to the 2 WIRE switchboard. It has an internal contact (C – NO – NC)
for connection of an electrical door lock, or an external actuator (for the powering of
the electrical door lock use an auxiliary transformer, item 336842). Connection (PL) for
connecting a local door lock release pushbutton. System power supply cuts do NOT cause
the loss of memory data.

1
5
2
4
3
View without lid

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand-by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Contact load (C - NO - NC):
Operating temperature:
Protection index:
Protection index against mechanical impact:

18 – 27 Vdc
30 mA
100 mA
1.2 A – 12 Vac / dc
(-25) – (+70) °C
IP44
IK08

14
13
12

6
7

J2
J1
BUS

2 C NO NC

PPN NTS

8
9

Legend

Dimensional data

1. Loudspeaker
A

2. Keypad lighting LED
3. Microphone
4. Alphanumeric keypad

OK key, code confirmation
key, door lock release
key, call to the switchboard

5. Display
6. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps (BUS)

8. Clamps (PL) for the connection of a local door lock release pushbutton
9. Contact clamps (C - NO - NC), for the connection of the door lock /external actuator
10. Microphone volume adjustment
11. Loudspeaker volume adjustment

BT00714-a -EN

7. Clamps (1 - 2) for the connection of the additional power supply

12. Configurator socket
13. Jumper J2- connected = enabled tones
A

130 mm

221 mm

C
38.7 mm

disconnected = disabled tones

14. Jumper J1- connected = additional power supply disabled
disconnected = additional power supply enabled

2 WIRE VDE system 231

TECHNICAL SHEETS

343100
Configuration

The device MUST be configured with physical configurator connection to the
appropriate sockets as follows:
P - entrance panel number
J2

The configurator in socket P of the device assigns to this a recognition number inside the
system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P = 0 (unless
the system includes a 2 WIRE switchboard). The entrance panel configured with P =
0 (no configurator connected) must be a standard (or main) entrance panel.

PPN NTS

N - NOT USED
T - door lock relay timing
P

Configurator number

0 = no
configurator

4 sec

1 sec

2 sec

3 sec

as
6 sec
pushbutt.

8 sec

10 sec

* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max after which it goes in stand-by.
In order to extend this type of operation over 10 seconds, use the actuator, item
346200 configured with MOD = 5.
S - type of call signal
The configurator in socket S of the device determines the call tone of handsets. One can
thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX, AXOLUTE and LIVINGLIGHT handsets, S associates the
Entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose
between 16 different preset bells.
For the SPRINT and SPRINT L2 handsets, S sets the call ringtone, according to the
following table:

BT00714-a -EN

Configurator

Type of bell

2-tone

One-tone

1200 Hz

600 Hz

0 Hz

2400 Hz

In one-family systems S=9 to configure the general call.

232 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

LINEA 100 audio pushbutton
panel for pushbutton call
Description

343101 - 343102
Front view

2 WIRE audio pushbutton panel with pushbutton call, available in two versions: 4 call
pushbuttons (343101) and 8 call pushbuttons (343102). They have an internal contact
(C – NO – NC) for connection of an electrical door lock, or an external actuator (for
the powering of the electrical door lock use an auxiliary transformer, item 336842).
Connection (PL) for connecting a local door lock release pushbutton. Wall mounted
installation.

1
2

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand-by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Local contact load (C - NO - NC):
Operating temperature:
Protection index:
Protection index against mechanical impact:

View without lid

18 – 27 Vdc
25 mA
55 mA
2 A – 12/24 Vac/dc
(-25) – (+70) °C
IP44
IK08

5
11
10

BUS

C NO NC

6
7

PPN NTS

9
8

Dimensional data
Legend

1. Loudspeaker
2. Nameplate
3. Call pushbuttons
4. Microphone
5. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps (BUS)
6. Clamps (PL) for the connection of a local door lock release pushbutton
7. Contact clamps (C - NO - NC), for the connection of the door lock /external actuator

8. Microphone volume adjustment
10. Configurator socket
11. Jumper J2 - connected = additional power supply disabled
disconnected = additional power supply enabled

130 mm

221 mm

BT00715-a -EN

9. Loudspeaker volume adjustment

C
38.7 mm

2 WIRE VDE system 233

TECHNICAL SHEETS

343101 - 343102
Configuration

The device MUST be configured with physical configurator connection to the
appropriate sockets as follows:

P - entrance panel number

PPN NTS

N - call number
P

The configurator connected to socket N of the device assigns the correspondence
between the entrance panel call pushbuttons and the handsets. For common
pushbutton entrance panels N must be configured with N = 0 (no configurator
connected). In local entrance panels, the first handset of the riser being called will
be the one configured with N+1 in relation to the entrance panel.

T - temporizzazione serratura
Configurator number

0 = no
configurator

4 sec

1 sec

2 sec

3 sec

as
6 sec
pushbutt.

8 sec

10 sec

BT00715-a -EN

For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX, AXOLUTE and LIVINGLIGHT handsets, S associates the
Entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose
between 16 different preset bells.
For the SPRINT and SPRINT L2 (344242) handsets, S sets the call ringtone, according to
the table at the side.

Configurator

Type of bell

2-tone

One-tone

1200 Hz

600 Hz

0 Hz

2400 Hz

In one-family systems S=9 to configure the general call.

234 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Flush mounted
LINEA 2000 METAL entrance panel

2
343001 - 343002

2
8

Description
Flush mounted 2-wire audio and video speaker module with Zamak front cover, colour
camera and night viewing white LED light. One and two-family version available.
The camera can be swivelled by +/-20°, both horizontally and vertically.
It provides the possibility of opening an electrical door lock connected directly to clamps
S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current). Flush mounted box supplied
as standard.

Related items
346250 (gate release relay module)
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
PI against mechanical impact
Sensor:
Lens:
Interlace:
Resolution:
Night lighting:
Brightness adjustment:

4
1

18 - 27 Vdc
40 mA
160 mA
(-20) - (+70)°C
IK10
1/3”
f: 4,3 mm; F: 1.5 mm
2:1
330 horizontal lines
white LEDs
automatic

Zamak front without panel

9 10

Dimensional data

163 mm

136 mm

Rear view

BUS

PL S+ S−

12
J2

Loudspeakers
BUS PL S+ S−
White LEDs for night lighting
Green LED for door status notification
Microphone
Call keys
Colour camera
13 12
Green LED: put through call notification
Red LED: busy system notification
8 - Green LED: active communication notification
9 - Microphone volume adjustment
10 - Loudspeaker volume adjustment
11 - J2: when connected, two columns of call pushbuttons are active, when disconnected
only one
12 - Door lock connection and local open door pushbutton
13 - Connection to the 2-wire SCS BUS.
14 - Configurator socket

BT00614-a -EN

1234567-

Legend

2 WIRE VDE system 235

TECHNICAL SHEETS

343001 - 343002
Configuration
The device must be configured as follows:
P - entrance panel number
The configurator in seat P of the speaker module assigns to it a recognition number
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets. In the common entrance panels made with pushbutton
modules, 1 must be inserted in N of the speaker module. The number of the first riser
handset must be inserted in the local entrance panels in N.

T - door lock relay timing
configurator number
0= No
configurator
4 sec.

1 sec. 2 sec.

3 sec.

as
6 sec.
pushbutt.

8 sec. 10 sec.

* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max, after which standby mode is activated.

To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with
MOD=5.

S-type of call signal with entrance panel door lock opening notification beep
The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
Table for SPRINT handset call signal
Configurator
Type of bell

0
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

1
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

3
One-tone
1200Hz

Installation
The camera must not be installed in front of intense light sources, or in locations where
the subject might be backlit. To avoid these problems try to change the installation
height of the camera, normally from 160-165 cm, to a height of 180 mm, and to
direct the lens downwards so that the shooting quality may be improved. In low light
conditions, the picture of the colour camera may be reproduced with a lower colour
rendition, in order to ensure the possibility to better identify the subject. For optimal
viewing, it is however recommended that an extra light sources is installed in scarcely
illuminated locations.

Flush mounted box

S-type of call signal without entrance panel door lock opening notification
beep
The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.

Frame
Speaker module

BT00614-a -EN

Table for SPRINT handset call signal
Configurator
Type of bell

4
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

5
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

6
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

7
One-tone
1200Hz

236 2 WIRE VDE system

Protrusion from
the wall: 21 mm

TECHNICAL SHEETS

MINISFERA
Audio pushbutton panel

342702

Description
2 WIRE speaker module to be used in audio systems.
Preset for 6 calls (expandable), it must be fitted with surround plate (item 332721,or
item 332726) and keys (item 332712, item 332713, item 332714, item 332715),
according to personal installation requirements.
The device must be configured depending on the type of key used.
The Loudspeaker volume and the sensitivity level of the microphone may be adjusted
using the corresponding potentiometers. The name plates are illuminated by green LEDs.
The dedicated jumpers can be removed to enable the following functions: Staircase light
switching on with dedicated key, and exclusion of the confirmation of the call from the
entrance panel.
The speaker module may be used to open an electric door lock connected using the
S+ and S- clamps (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current 30 Ω max).
Related items
332710
332711
332712
332713
332714
332715
332721
332726

(flush mounted box)
(surface-mounted box)
(narrow key 1 module with name label)
(wide key 2 modules with name label)
(2 modules nameplate with label)
(1 module false key - grey)
(aluminium surround plate)
(titanium surround plate)

2
3

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 - 27 Vdc
40 mA
90 mA
(-25) - (+70)°C

Dimensional data

9
8
BUS

100 mm

PL S S

P N TS

21 mm

5
7

160cm

Legend
1 - Call keys
2 - Microphone
3 - Loudspeaker
4 - Configurator socket
5 - Entrance panel call sound exclusion (remove the jumper to enable)
6 - Staircase light switching on with dedicated key (remove the jumper to enable)
7 - Clamps for BUS connection, door lock and local pushbutton.
8 - Microphone sensitivity adjustment
9 - Loudspeaker volume adjustment

BT00615-a -EN

245 mm

2 WIRE VDE system 237

TECHNICAL SHEETS

342702
Configuration
The device must be configured (only phisically) as follows:
P - entrance panel number
The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons, and the audio
handsets.
In common entrance panels made using pushbutton modules, 1 must be inserted in N of
the speaker module. In secondary entrance panels, the number of the first riser handset
must be inserted in N.

Inside the MINISFERA audio speaker module are JUMPERS that can be used for
performing the following functions:
• Jumper
- EP call confirmation
To eliminate the entrance panel call confirmation sound remove the JUMPER

• Jumper
- staircase light switching on with call key
To switch on the staircase the light from the entrance panel using the last call key,
remove the JUMPER

• Jumper – call pushbutton exclusion
Connect the jumper to exclude the call pushbutton.

T - Door lock relay timing
configurator number
0= No
configurator
4 sec.

1 sec. 2 sec.

3 sec.

as
6 sec.
pushbutt.

8 sec. 10 sec.

* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max, after which standby mode is activated.

To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with
MOD=5.

S - type of call signal
The configuration of S determines the call tone of SPRINT handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.

call pushbutton enabled

NOTA: disable the pushbuttons based on the false poles, and the single, or the double
keys connected.

Table for SPRINT handset call signal
Configurator
Type of bell

0
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

1
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

Double
keys

3
One-tone
1200Hz

Example - To use the double key the upper level call must be disabled.

Installation
Flush mounted installation

art. 332710

Wall mounted installation

art. 332710

max ø 5mm

BT00615-a -EN

art. 332711
160cm

160cm

238 2 WIRE VDE system

call pushbutton disabled

art. 332711

TECHNICAL SHEETS

MINISFERA black and white
video pushbutton panel

342708

Description
2 WIRE speaker module to be used in video or mixed audio/video systems.
Preset for 4 calls (expandable), it must be fitted with surround plate (item 332721, item
332726) and keys (item 332712, item 332713, item 332714, item 332715), according to
personal installation requirements.
The device must be configured depending on the type of key used.
The Loudspeaker volume and the sensitivity level of the microphone may be adjusted
using the corresponding potentiometers.
The dedicated jumpers can be removed to enable the following functions: Staircase light
switching on with dedicated key, and exclusion of the confirmation of the call from the
entrance panel. If the IR LED allow night lighting of the field of view.
The camera field of view may be adjusted by +/-15 degrees both horizontally and
vertically.
The speaker module provides the possibility of opening an electrical door lock connected
directly to clamps S+ and S- (18V 4A impulsive, 250mA holding current 30Ω max). The
door lock can also be powered locally using a transformer, or the actuator item 346230/
item 346260.

Related items
332710
332711
332712
332713
332714
332715
332721
332726

15°

4
18 - 27 Vdc
40 mA
280 mA
(-25) - (+70)°C

11
10
9

Dimensional data
100 mm

15°
15°

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

15°

21 mm

5
6

8
7

160cm

1 - Call keys
2 - Microphone
3 - Camera field of view adjustment screws
4 - IR LED for night lighting of the field of view
5 - Configurator socket
6 - Entrance panel call confirmation exclusion. (remove the jumper to enable)
7 - Staircase light switching on with dedicated key (remove the jumper to enable)
8 - Terminal board for 2 WIRE connections, door lock and opening of entrance door lock
9 - Microphone sensitivity adjustment
10 - Loudspeaker volume adjustment
11 - Loudspeaker

BT00616-a -EN

245 mm

Legend

2 WIRE VDE system 239

TECHNICAL SHEETS

342708
Configuration
The device must be configured (only phisically) as follows:
P - entrance panel number
The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons, and the audio
handsets.
In common entrance panels made using pushbutton modules, 1 must be inserted in N of
the speaker module. In secondary entrance panels, the number of the first riser handset
must be inserted in N.

Inside the MINISFERA audio speaker module are JUMPERS that can be used for
performing the following functions:
• Jumper

- EP call confirmation

To eliminate the entrance panel call confirmation sound remove the JUMPER

• Jumper
- staircase light switching on with call key
To switch on the staircase the light from the entrance panel using the last call key,
remove the JUMPER

• Jumper – call pushbutton exclusion
Connect the jumper to exclude the call pushbutton.

T - Door lock relay timing
configurator number
0= No
configurator

4 sec.

1 sec. 2 sec.

3 sec.

S - type of call signal
The configuration of S determines the call tone of SPRINT handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.

call pushbutton enabled

call pushbutton disabled

NOTE: disable the pushbuttons based on the false poles, and the single, or the double
keys connected.

Table for SPRINT handset call signal
Configurator
Type of bell

0
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

1
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

3
One-tone
1200Hz

Double
keys

Example - To use the double key the upper level call must be disabled.

Installation
Wall mounted installation

Flush mounted installation

art. 332710

max ø 5mm

BT00616-a -EN

art. 332711
160cm

240 2 WIRE VDE system

160cm

max ø 5mm

art. 332711

TECHNICAL SHEETS

MINISFERA
additional pushbutton panel

342704

Description
Additional 2 WIRE pushbutton module to be used together with audio modules item
342702 and item 342708.
Preset for 10 calls, it must be fitted with surround plate (item 332721, item 332726)
and keys (item 332712, item 332713, item 332714, item 332715), according to personal
installation requirements.
It may be installed side by side with, or above/below, the speaker module.
Maximum 6 expansion modules may be connected to a speaker module, item 342702,
or item 342708.
It is supplied with multicable for the connection of the speaker module to other key
expansion modules.
The device must be configured based on the type of keys used, as for audio modules
items 342702 and item 342708.
Related items
342702
342708
332710
332711
332712
332713
332714
332715
332721
332726

(MINISFERA audio speaker module)
(MINISFERA video speaker module)
(flush mounted box)
(surface-mounted box)
(narrow key 1 module with name label)
(wide key 2 modules with name label)
(2 modules nameplate with label)
(1 module false key - grey)
(aluminium surround plate)
(titanium surround plate)

Technical data

Legend

Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 - 27 Vdc
Max. operating absorption: 30 mA
Operating temperature:
(-25) - (+70)°C

1 - Call keys
2 - Multicable supplied

Dimensional data
100 mm

BT00617-a -EN

245 mm

21 mm

2 WIRE VDE system 241

TECHNICAL SHEETS

342704
Wiring diagram
To connect the speaker module (audio or video) to the 10 key module, the cable supplied
must be used. The same cable must be used to connect other key modules to each other.
A
Audio or video
speaker module

Connect the cable to OUT of the speaker module and to IN of the first key module.
Connect the 2nd cable to OUT to the first key module and to IN of the second key module,
and so on.

B
First
key module

C
Second
key module

OUT

from
OUT A

to
IN B

a
IN C

Example - Connection of two expansion modules, item 342704, and one MINISFERA audio or video speaker module.

Installation

BT00617-a -EN

Horizontal side-by-side

Vertical side-by-side

242 2 WIRE VDE system

from
OUT B

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA CLASSIC,
speaker module for audio systems

342150

Description
Speaker module for 2 WIRE system.
It is possible to connect to this device nameplate modules (item 342200), or pushbutton
modules (item 342240). It can be used to install audio systems with up to 56 handsets.
It is possible to connect to this device one electric door lock that may be powered by the
item 336842 transformer placed nearby the speaker module.

Related items
332111
332112
332113
332121
332122
332123

(speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allmetal)
(speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - White)
(speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Alugray)
(speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Allmetal)
(speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - White)
(speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Alugray)

For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue.
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

Legend
1 - Configurator socket and potentiometers for the adjustment of the microphone and
loudspeaker volumes.
3 - Connector socket, for connection to the BUS, the electric door lock, and the entrance
hall door lock release pushbutton.
2 - Connector socket, for connection to the nameplate module or the pushbutton
module.

18 – 27 Vdc
25 mA
75 mA
(-25)-(+70)°C

Dimensional data

89 mm

100 mm

BT00618-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 243

TECHNICAL SHEETS

342150
Configuration
The device must be phisically configured as follows:
P - entrance panel number
The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
inside the system.
The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0. The entrance panel
configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons, and the audio
handsets. In the common entrance panels made with pushbutton modules, 1 must
be inserted in N of the speaker module. The number of the first riser handset must be
inserted in the local entrance panels in N.
T - Door lock relay timing
configurator number
0= No
configurator
4 sec.

1 sec. 2 sec.

BT00618-a -EN

244 2 WIRE VDE system

3
3 sec.

as
6 sec.
pushbutt.

8 sec. 10 sec.

0
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

1
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

3
One-tone
1200Hz

TECHNICAL SHEETS

342150
Installation and connection
Supplied as standard with the speaker module is a closing accessory with connector.
The accessory must be fitted in the last pushbutton module of the pushbutton panel,
after connecting the modules to each other using the multicables with connectors.
It must not be used if the pushbutton panel only consists of a 1 or 2 pushbutton speaker
module, in addition to a camera module that may be installed.

Speaker module

Pushbutton module
Speaker module

Closing accessory
Closing accessory
Example – entrance panel only consisting of the Speaker module. It does not
require the accessory.
- In order to connect several key modules vertically on different columns, item 346092
must be used (see Example), and the closing accessory must be fitted in the last
module.

Example – entrance panel consisting of the speaker module and 4 keys: the
accessory must be fitted.

346902

Closing accessory

Example - connection of
pushbutton panel.

BT00618-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 245

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA CLASSIC speaker module
with 2 call pushbuttons

342170

Description
Speaker module for 2 WIRE system.
The following devices can be connected to the speaker module:
- Colour camera module to realize the video systems item 342550
- Black and white camera module to realize video systems item 342510
- Nameplate module item 342200
- Pushbuttons module item 342240
- Numeric digital call module item 342610
- Alphanumeric digital call module item 342600
All the described modules are connected to the speaker module by means of the
appropriate multi-cables. The speaker module allows to make systems of up to 100
handsets and the opening of an electric door lock directly connected between clamps
S+ S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current). The door lock can be locally supplied
by a transformer or using the actuators item 346230 or item 346260.
Related items
332111 (speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allmetal)
332112 (speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - White)
332113 (speaker module front cover, 1 pushbutton - Alugray)
332121 (speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Allmetal)
332122 (speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - White)
332123 (speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Alugray)
For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue.
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
25 mA
75 mA
(-25)-(+70)°C

Dimensional data

89 mm

100 mm

BT00619-a -EN

246 2 WIRE VDE system

5
4

Legend
1 - Removable connector for the connection of the additional power supply
2 - Removable connector for the connection of the BUS, the electrical door lock, and the
entrance hall door lock release pushbutton.
3 - Socket for the connection of the nameplate module, the pushbuttons module or the
digital call module
4 - Connection socket for the camera connector.
5 - Socket for configurators and potentiometers to adjust the microphone and
loudspeaker volume, jumper for adaptation to the type of door lock and the
alphanumeric call module.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

342170
Configuration
The device must be configured as follows:
P - entrance panel number
The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets. In common entrance panels made using pushbutton
modules, 1 must be inserted in N of the speaker module. The number of the first riser
handset must be inserted in the local entrance panels. When the entrance panel is
made with speaker module and digital call module (item 342630 or item 342610) no
configurator must be inserted in N.
T - door lock relay timing
configurator number
0= No
configurator
4 sec.

1 sec. 2 sec.

3
3 sec.

as
6 sec.
pushbutt.

8 sec. 10 sec.

0
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

1
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

3
One-tone
1200Hz

For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the S configurator associates the
Entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems S=9 to configure the general call.
JUMPERS (JMP1) and ( JMP2) - Critical door lock power supply:
Remove the JMP1 and JMP2 jumpers to connect to the speaker module a door lock with
independent power supply.
JUMPER (JMP3) - EP local power supply
Remove the JMP3 jumpers when the speaker module is powered by an additional power
supply.

* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max, after which standby mode is activated.

To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with
MOD=5.
= disconnected jumper

JMP 3

JMP 1

JMP 4

JMP 2

= connected jumper

BT00619-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 247

TECHNICAL SHEETS

342170
Installation and connection
Supplied as standard with the speaker module is a closing accessory with connector.
The accessory must be fitted in the last pushbutton module of the pushbutton panel,
after connecting the modules to each other using the multicables with connectors.
It must not be used if the pushbutton panel only consists of a 1 or 2 pushbutton speaker
module, in addition to a camera module that may be installed.

Camera module

Speaker module
Camera module

Pushbuttons module
Speaker module

Accessory
Accessory
Example: entrance panel consisting of camera module and speaker module. It
does not require the accessory supplied with the product.

Example: speaker module consisting of camera module, speaker module and
4-pushbutton module; the accessory supplied as standard must also be used.

346902

- With entrance panels with less than 26 calls, it is necessary to connect the modules
in a vertical position on several columns using item 346902, and to fit in the last
pushbutton module the accessory supplied as standard.
- For entrance panels with more than 26 calls it is necessary to connect the modules
in a vertical position on several columns using item 346902 . After the sixth key
module (or after 26 calls), fit item 346903 and invert the flat supplied as standard.
In the last key module fit the accessory supplied as standard.
Accessory

Example - Connection of
pushbutton panel with less
than 26 calls

BT00619-a -EN

346902

346903

1
4
180°

Accessory
Connection item 346903 and flat inversion.

248 2 WIRE VDE system

Example - Connection of pushbutton panel with more than 26 calls.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA CLASSIC, speaker module
with 4 call pushbuttons

342350

(speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Allmetal)
(speaker module front cover, 4 call pushbuttons - Allmetal)
(speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - White)
(speaker module front cover, 4 call pushbuttons - White)
(speaker module front cover, 2 pushbuttons - Alugray)
(speaker module front cover, 4 call pushbuttons - Alugray)

1
5

Legend
1 - Socket for configurators and potentiometers to adjust the microphone and
loudspeaker volume, jumper for adaptation to the type of door lock and the
alphanumeric call module.
2 - Removable connector for the connection of the additional power supply.
3 - Removable connector for the connection of the BUS, the electrical door lock, and the
entrance hall door lock release pushbutton.
4 - Socket for the connection of the nameplate module, the pushbutton module or the
digital call module.
5 - Connection socket for the camera connector.

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
25 mA
75 mA
(-25)-(+70)°C

Dimensional data

89 mm

100 mm

BT00620-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 249

TECHNICAL SHEETS

342350
Configuration
The device must be phisically configured as follows:
P - entrance panel number
The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
inside the system.
The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets. In the common entrance panels made with pushbutton
modules, 1 must be inserted in N of the speaker module. The number of the first riser
handset must be inserted in the local entrance panels in N. When the entrance panel
is made with speaker module and digital call module (item 342630 or item 342610) no
configurator must be inserted in N.

configurator number

4 sec.

1 sec. 2 sec.

Table for SPRINT handset call signal
Configurator
Type of bell

0
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

1
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

3
One-tone
1200Hz

For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the S configurator associates the
entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose
between 16 different bells.
In one-family systems, S=9 configures the general call and the handsets ring, the
same as with the S=0.
JUMPERS (JMP1) and ( JMP2) - Critical door lock power supply:
Remove the JMP1 and JMP2 jumpers to connect to the speaker module a door lock with
independent power supply.

T – Door lock control time delay
0= No
configurator

S - type of call signal
The configuration of S determines the call tone of SPRINT handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.

3
3 sec.

as
6 sec.
pushbutt.

8 sec. 10 sec.

JUMPER (JMP3) - EP local power supply
Remove the JMP3 jumpers when the speaker module is powered by an additional power
supply.

* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max, after which standby mode is activated.

To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with
MOD=5.
= disconnected jumper
= connected jumper

BT00620-a -EN

250 2 WIRE VDE system

JMP 3

JMP 1

JMP 4

JMP 2

TECHNICAL SHEETS

342350
Installation and connection
Supplied as standard with the speaker module is a closing accessory with connector.
The accessory must be fitted in the last pushbutton module of the pushbutton panel,
after connecting the modules to each other using the multicables with connectors.
It must not be used if the pushbutton panel only consists of a 1 or 2 pushbutton speaker
module, in addition to a camera module that may be installed.

Camera module

Speaker module

Pushbutton module
Speaker module

Closing accessory
Closing accessory

Example - Entrance panel consisting of camera module and speaker module.
It does not require the accessory.

Example - entrance panel consisting of camera module, speaker module and
pushbutton module. It requires the accessory supplied with the product.

- In order to connect several key modules vertically on different columns, item 346092
must be used, fitting the closing accessory in the last module.
346902

BT00620-a -EN

Closing accessory

Example - connection with pushbutton modules.

2 WIRE VDE system 251

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA CLASSIC
audio video speaker module

342560

Description
1

Audio/video speaker module for 2 wire system fitted with colour camera with LED
lighting for night viewing.
Camera with slant adjustment horizontally and vertically by ±20°.
The connections to the system are made by wiring the removable clamp supplied; the
nameplates are illuminated by green LEDs. A closing card to be inserted in the last
pushbutton module is supplied.
To be completed with the modular “Audio/video” front covers.
The speaker module allows to make systems of up to 100 handsets and the opening of
an electric door lock directly connected between the clamps S+ S– (18 V 4 A impulsive,
250 mA holding current). The door lock can be locally supplied with a transformer, or
using the actuators item 346230 or item 346260.

Front view

Related items
342461 (modular A/V front cover without call pushbuttons - Allmetal)
342462 (modular A/V front cover without call pushbuttons - White)
342463 (modular A/V front cover without call pushbuttons - Alugray)
342471 (modular A/V front cover with 1 call pushbutton - Allmetal)
342472 (modular A/V front cover with 1 call pushbutton - White)
342473 (modular A/V front cover with 1 call pushbutton - Alugray)
342481 (modular A/V front cover with 2 call pushbutton - Allmetal)
342482 (modular A/V front cover with 2 call pushbutton - White)
342483 (modular A/V front cover with 2 call pushbutton - Alugray)

Legend
1 - Loudspeakers
2 - White LEDs for night lighting
3 - Green LED for door status notification
4 - Microphone
5 - Call pushbuttons
6 - Colour camera
7 - Green LED: put through call notification
Red LED: busy system notification
8 - Green LED: active communication notification

Technical data
18 – 27 Vdc
40 mA
160 mA
(-25)-(+70)°C
1.5 mm ; f: 4.3 mm
1/3”
2:1
330 lines
white LEDs
automatic

1 2 3 4

ART.342560

USB

J2
J1

P
N

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
Lens: F:
Sensor:
Interlace:
Horizontal resolution:
Night lighting:
Brightness adjustment:

BUS

PL S+ S−

Dimensional data
40°

Rear view

Legend
BT00621-a -EN
89 mm

100 mm

252 2 WIRE VDE system

40°

1 - Microphone volume adjustment
2 - Loudspeaker volume adjustment
3 - J1: remove to enable additional power supply
4 - J2: when connected, two columns of call pushbuttons are active, when disconnected
only one column is active
5 - Door lock connection and local open door pushbutton
6 - Connection to the 2 wire BUS
7 - Connection to the additional power supply
8 - Connection to the additional pushbuttons
9 - Configurator socket
10 - USB connector for PC connection

TECHNICAL SHEETS

342560
Configuration

(J1)

The device must be configured as follows:

(J2)

P - entrance panel number
The configurator in seat P of the speaker module assigns to it a recognition number
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.

ART.342560
J2
J1

USB
P
N

N - call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets. In the common entrance panels made with pushbutton
modules, 1 must be inserted in N of the speaker module. The number of the first riser
audio and video handset must be inserted in the local entrance panels in N.

BUS

PL S+ S−

T - door lock relay timing
configurator number
0= No
configurator
4 sec.

1 sec. 2 sec.

3 sec.

as
6 sec.
pushbutt.

8 sec. 10 sec.

* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max, after which standby mode is activated.

To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with
MOD=5.
S-type of call signal with entrance panel door lock opening notification beep
The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets. One can thus
differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.

J1 - EP local power supply
Remove the JMP1 jumpers when the speaker module is supplied by a dedicated power
supply.
J2 - activation of pushbutton columns
When connected, two columns of call pushbuttons are active, when disconnected only
one column is active.

ART.342560
USB

0
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

1
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

N
TS

Configurator
Type of bell

Table for SPRINT handset call signal

2
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

BUS

PL S+ S−

3
One-tone
1200Hz

For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the S configurator associates the
Entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems, S=9 configures the general call and
the handsets ring, the same as with the S=0.
S-type of call signal without entrance panel door lock opening notification beep
The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.

Configurator
Type of bell

4
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

5
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

Camera installation notes
6
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

7
One-tone
1200Hz

The camera must not be installed facing strong light sources, or in locations where the
area being shot is strongly backlit. In order to resolve these problems, we recommend
that the camera is installed at a height of 180 cm, instead of the usual 160-165 cm,
with the lens pointing down. This will improve image quality. In low light situations,
the colour rendition of the image displayed by the colour camera may decrease. This is
to ensure that the person being displayed can be better recognised. For optimal viewing
in low light conditions, the installation of an additional light source is recommended.

BT00621-a -EN

Table for SPRINT handset call signal

Supplied as standard with the audio and video speaker module, is a closing accessory
with connector. The accessory must be fitted in the last pushbutton module of the
entrance panel, after connecting the modules to each other using the multicables.

2 WIRE VDE system 253

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA CLASSIC,
speaker module with graphic display

342630

Description
1

Speaker module for 2 WIRE system with graphic display.
Can send the call to an handset by scrolling the residents’ names or codes on a display
(previously programmed).
It integrates the speaker module and the resident search function on graphic display in
one device. The module can save up to 1000 residents’ names and surnames associating
them to the apartment SCS address.
500 names can be saved when the option of coupling a message with them is selected.
If only the residents’ codes are saved, the capacity extends to 5000 codes
The names may be programmed in the address book in the following ways:
- Using the keys of the module
- Using the dedicated TICALL software (which can be downloaded from the www.bticino
website) - (it also gives the possibility of updating the firmware after entering the user
password).
To make the call:
- Scroll the names using keys ref. 5 and 6
- Press key ref. 4 (flashing) to send the call
NOTE: System power supply cuts do not cause the loss of memory data.

Related items
332661 (speaker module front cover - Allmetal)
332662 (speaker module front cover - White)
332663 (speaker module front cover - Alugray)
For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue.
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
110 mA
160 mA
(-25)-(+70)°C

BT00622-a -EN

89 mm

Dimensional data

100 mm

254 2 WIRE VDE system

3
4
5
6
8

Legend
1 - Loudspeaker
2 - Connector to the RS-232 port of the PC (use the cable item 335919)
3 - Microphone
4 - Call forward key
5 - Scroll key (Up)
6 - Scroll key (Down)
7 - IR receiver (programming using the remote control)
8 - Graphic display

TECHNICAL SHEETS

342630
Configuration
The device must be phisically configured as follows:
P - entrance panel number
The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
inside the system.
The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0. The entrance panel
configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
T - Door lock relay timing
configurator number
0= No
configurator
4 sec.

1 sec. 2 sec.

3
3 sec.

as
6 sec.
pushbutt.

S – type of call signal
The configuration of S determines the call tone of handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
Table for handset call signal
Configurator
Type of bell

0
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

1
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

3
One-tone
1200Hz

For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the configurator associates the
entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems S=9 to configure the general call.

8 sec. 10 sec.

* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max, after which standby mode is activated.

To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with
MOD=5.
J1/J2 - Critical door lock power supply
Remove the JMP1 and JMP2 jumpers to connect to the speaker module a door lock with
independent power supply.
J3 - EP local power supply
When the device is powered locally remove jumper JMP3
J4 - it confirms the EP call
To eliminate the entrance panel call confirmation sound, remove the J4 jumper.

= disconnected jumper

JMP 3

JMP 1

JMP 4

JMP 2

= connected jumper

J3 J1

J4 J2
loudspeaker volume
adjustment
microphone sensitivity
adjustment

Secret code
Language
Address book format
Switchboard
Direct call
Door code
Contrast
Recall

1234
Italian
Alphanumeric without message
4000 Disabled
0000 and 0001 Disabled
1234, 1235, 1236, 1237 and 1238
50
Disabled

BT00622-a -EN

Factory configuration

2 WIRE VDE system 255

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA CLASSIC,
black & white camera module

342510

Description
SFERA 2 WIRE black & white camera module.
CMOS technology, fitted with IR so that it can be used in poorly lit surroundings.
To be used together with 2-wire speaker modules (connection using a multicable).
During installation it is possible to swivel the lens horizontally and vertically by +/- 15°.

1
2
3

The device must not be configured.

Related items
342170
342350
342630
332511
332512
332513

(speaker module with 2 call pushbuttons)
(speaker module with 4 call pushbuttons)
(speaker module with graphic display)
(modular camera front cover - Allmetal)
(modular camera front cover - White)
(modular camera front cover - Alugray)
1 2

For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue.

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Max. operating absorption:
Stand by absorption:
Operating temperature:
Camera sensor:
Lens: f : 2.0 mm; F :
Interlace:
Resolution:
Night lighting:
Brightness adjustment:

18-27 Vdc
250 mA
15 mA
(-25)-(+70)°C
1/3”
4.3 mm
2:1
380 horizontal lines
LED IR
automatic (linear)

Legend
1 - Fixing screw for the adjustment of the lens position
2 - Lens
3 - IR LED for night lighting of the field of view
4 - Multicable for connection to speaker module
Lens adjustment

Dimensional data
100 mm

89 mm

(-15)-(+15)°
BT00623-a -EN

(-15)-(+15)°

1 2

256 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA CLASSIC,
Colour camera module

342550

Description
SFERA swivel colour camera module
CCD technology, fitted with white LEDs so that it can be used in
poorly lit surroundings. To be used together with 2-wire speaker modules (connection
using a multicable).
During installation it is possible to swivel the lens horizontally and vertically.

1
2
3
2

The device must not be configured.
Related items
342170 (Speaker module with 2 call pushbuttons)
342350 (Speaker module with 4 call pushbuttons)
342630 (Speaker module with Graphic display)
332511 (modular camera front cover - Allmetal)
332512 (modular camera front cover - White)
332513 (modular camera front cover - Alugray)
1 2

For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue.

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Max. operating absorption:
Stand by absorption:
Operating temperature:
Camera sensor:
Lens:
Sensibility:
Interlace:
Horizontal resolution:
Vertical resolution:
Night lighting:
Brightness adjustment:

18-27 Vdc
165 mA
15 mA
(-25)-(+70)°C
1/4”
f : 2.8 mm; F : 3 mm
0.4 lux - F1.4
2:1
> 330 lines
400 lines
white LEDs
automatic (linear)

Legend
1 - Lens slant adjustment
2 - White LEDs for night lighting
3 - Lens
4 - Multicable for connection to speaker module
Lens adjustment

Dimensional data
1
100 mm

89 mm

(-15) ÷ (+15)°
BT00624-a -EN

(-15) ÷ (+15)°

1 2

2 WIRE VDE system 257

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA CLASSIC
4-pushbutton module

342240

Description
2 wire pushbutton module with 4 call pushbuttons. The connections to the system are
made using the multi-cable supplied; also, the nameplates are illuminated by 12 green
LED. To be used with speaker modules, items 342150 and 342170, and with modular
front covers and pushbutton monobloc.
The device must not be configured.
Related items
332231
332232
332233
332241
332242
332243

(front cover with 3 keys - Allmetal)
(front cover with 3 keys - White)
(front cover with 3 keys - Alugray)
(front cover with 4 keys - Allmetal)
(front cover with 4 keys - White)
(front cover with 4 keys - Alugray)

For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue.
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
15 mA
15 mA
(-25) – (+70) °C

Dimensional data

89 mm

100 mm

BT00625-a -EN

258 2 WIRE VDE system

Legend
1 - Connector socket for output connection with other modules and for the last
pushbutton module, housing for the electronic card supplied as standard with the
speaker module.
2 - Input socket for connection with other modules.
3 - Call pushbuttons.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA CLASSIC
8 pushbutton module

342480

Description
2 WIRE pushbutton module with 8 call pushbuttons. Connections to the system are
made using the multicable supplied: also, name plates are illuminated by 12 green
LEDs. To be used with speaker modules, items 342560 and 342350, and with modular
“pushbutton” front covers with double row of keys.
The device must not be configured.
Related items
332461
332462
332463
332481
332482
332483

(modular front cover with 6 pushbuttons - Allmetal)
(modular front cover with 6 pushbuttons - White)
(modular front cover with 6 pushbuttons - Alugray)
(modular front cover with 8 pushbuttons - Allmetal)
(modular front cover with 8 pushbuttons - White)
(modular front cover with 8 pushbuttons - Alugray)

For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue.
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
15 mA
15 mA
(-25) – (+70) °C

Dimensional data

89 mm

100 mm

BT00626-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 259

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA CLASSIC, additional alphanumeric
Keypad module

342640

Description
Additional alphanumeric keypad module to be used in conjunction with the speaker
module with graphic display, item 342630.
It can call the resident directly (by typing the programmed code) and access the door
lock release function (by typing the secret code).
It is supplied with multi-cable and connector for connection to the speaker module.
To be used with the “Alphanumeric keypad” front covers.
Once the last digit has been entered, the call is forwarded automatically.
The digits are NOT displayed on the speaker module display, item 342630.
System power supply cuts do NOT cause the loss of memory data.

Legend
1 - Alphanumeric keypad
2 - Door lock opening key
3 - Cancel key

332671 (modular keypad front cover - Allmetal)
332672 (modular keypad front cover - White)
332673 (modular keypad front cover - Alugray)
For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue.
Technical data
18 – 27 Vdc
15 mA
15 mA
(-25) – (+70) °C

Dimensional data
100 mm

89 mm

Related items

BT00627-a -EN

260 2 WIRE VDE system

2
5
0

The device must not be configured.

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

1
4

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA CLASSIC, digital numeric
call module

342610

Description
1

The numeric call module can make calls from the entrance panel to handsets by just
keying in the number corresponding to the handset required.
The correspondence between the numbers and the user names is found from a phone
book by the side of the module and made up of nameplate modules Item 342200.
From one to four numbers may be keyed in to make the call, as programmed by the
installer.
The module can also activate the electric door lock by means of a secret code number.
The module is supplied with a multicable for the connection to the speaker module.
To be used with keypad monobloc front covers and alphanumeric keypad modular front
cover.
The call is forwarded automatically after the last digit has been entered.
System power supply cuts do NOT cause the loss of memory data.

3
4
5

The device must not be configured.
Legend

Related items
332651 (modular keypad front cover - Allmetal)
332652 (modular keypad front cover - White)
332653 (modular keypad front cover - Alugray)
For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue.
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
15 mA
15 mA
(-25) – (+70) °C

1 - Numeric keypad
2 - Numeric LED display (4 digits)
3 - Yellow call confirmation LED
4 - Red local conversation active signalling LED
5 - Green line free signalling LED
6 - Deleting key
7 - Door lock opening key
8 - Key for programming

Dimensional data

89 mm

100 mm

BT00628-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 261

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA CLASSIC
Nameplate module

342200
to the speaker
module or to other
pushbuttons or
nameplate module

Description
SFERA nameplate module which can be used to enter the street number or any other
information. Can be used to enter a caption in pushbutton panels with numerical call
module item 342610. To be used with the “Nameplate” modular front cover.
Nameplate lighting by green LEDs.
A flat-cable for the connection to other modules is supplied.
The device must not be configured.
Related items
332201 (Allmetal nameplate front cover)
332202 (White nameplate front cover)
332203 (Alugray nameplate front cover)

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Max. operating absorption:
Stand by absorption:
Operating temperature:

18-27 Vdc
15 mA
15 mA
(-25)-(+70)°C

Dimensional data

89 mm

100 mm

BT00629-a -EN

262 2 WIRE VDE system

to other
pushbuttons
or nameplate
module

Legend
1 - Connector socket for output connection with other modules, and housing for the
electronic card supplied as standard with the speaker module (to be used on the last
nameplate module only)
2 - Input socket for connection with other modules.
3 - Namecard for address number, legend of call addresses or other information.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SFERA CLASSIC
CODE-LOCK module

332650

Description
Electronic module fitted with lit keypad for the activation of electric door locks and
auxiliary systems, by entering 3, 4, and 5 digit numbers. The programming of numerical
codes is performed directly on the keypad. It is possible to save two different codes for
the control of two different door locks, or one door lock and one auxiliary system.
The device consists of a pushbutton panel with 12 keys, luminous indicators for correct
programming control, and the activation of the desired function; an audible signal
confirms that the key had been activated.
The device has independent power supply and operation.

2
3

The device must not be configured.
Legend

Related items

1 - Red Confirmation LED
2 - LED available for signalling purposes
3 - Connector output enabling LED (8)
4 - Connector output enabling LED (7)
5 - Numeric keypad
6 - Jumper to be removed/refitted to RESET the device and the factory codes
7 - Connector (RELAY A)
8 - Connector (RELAY B)

332651 (code-lock modular front cover - Allmetal)
332652 (code-lock modular front cover - White)
332653 (code-lock modular front cover - Alugray)
For the use of monobloc front covers refer to the catalogue.
Technical data
Power supply (external): 12 Vdc (+20) - (-5)%, 100 mA

12 Vac (+20) - (-5)%, 110 mA
Operating temperature: (-25)-(+70)°C

Sound signals for:
- Acceptance of the pressed key
- Acceptance of the new programming performed
- Programming or code error

Dimensional data

100 mm

89 mm

RELAY B

RELAY A

Connector (7):
1 - 0 Vdc / 0 Vac

2 - 12 Vdc / 12 Vac
3 - Common - relay A
4 - A relay NO contact
5 - A relay NC contact
6 - Common - relay B
7 - B relay NO contact
8 - B relay NC contact
Connector (8):
9 - 0 Vdc signalling LED
10 - 12 Vdc signalling LED
11 - Day/night timer input
12 - Day/night timer output
13 - Input of the relay control, output (B) from the door lock key of the handset

BT00630-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 263

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Vandal-resistant monobloc
pushbutton panels
Description

308001 - 308002
308003 - 308004 - 308005 - 308011
308012 - 308013 - 308014 - 308015
Front view

Monobloc vandal-resistant 2 wire video pushbutton panels for flush mounted or wall
mounted installation (with dedicated box sold separately). Solutions available with
1 to 32 call keys, with aluminium or stainless steel finishing front cover.
The item includes: flush-mounted box, frame, colour video and audio electronic module,
module/s and pushbuttons already wired. Presetting for the mounting of transponder
reader or key switch. Backlit call keys. Visual and sound notification of the communication
status for: call presence, system busy, door lock status.
Direct control of an electric door lock 18 V - 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current
(30 ohm max).

Wall mounted box - for 4 keys set 308001 - 308011
Wall mounted box - for 8 keys set 308002 - 308012
Wall mounted box - for 12 keys set 308003 - 308013
Wall mounted box - for 20 keys set 308004 - 308014
Wall mounted box - for 32 keys set308005 - 308015
Relay to control door lock not managed by BUS
additional 2 DIN modules power supply

Technical data

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand-by absorption:

Operating absorption:

Camera sensor:
Camera lens:
Resolution:
Brightness adjustment:
Night lighting:
Operating temperature:
Protection index:
Mechanical impact:

10
2

9
8

4
5

Related items

308021
308022
308023
308024
308025
346250
346020

7
Legend

18 – 27 Vdc
308001 – 308011 (55 mA)
308002 – 308012 (70 mA)
308003 – 308013 (85 mA)
308004 – 308014 (115 mA)
308005 – 308015 (160 mA)
308001 – 308011 (175 mA)
308002 – 308012 (190 mA)
308003 – 308013 (205 mA)
308004 – 308014 (235 mA)
308005 – 308015 (280 mA)
1/3”
F:1.5 mm ; f:4.3 mm
330 lines (horizontal)
automatic
with white LEDs
(-25) – (+70) °C
IP44
IK07

1. Colour camera
2. White LEDs for the lighting of the camera shooting field
3. Preset housing for transponder reader or key switch
4. Door status notification LED: green LED = door open
5. Microphone
6. Name labels
7. Call key
8. Call status notification LED: green LED = call forwarded
red LED = system busy
9. Communication status notification LED: green LED = communication active
10. Loudspeaker

Dimensional data

BT00631-a -EN

2 - 4 calls pushbutton panels - item 308001 - 308011
dimensions: W 180 x H 270 mm
Wall mounted box - item 308021 : W 178 x H 267 x D 40 mm
Flush mounted box (supplied): W 128 x H 220 x P 53 mm

13 - 20 calls pushbutton panels - item 308004 - 308014
dimensions: W 180 x H 440 mm
Wall mounted box - item 308024 : W 178 x H 437 x D 40 mm
Flush mounted box (supplied): W 128 x H 400 x P 53 mm

5 - 8 calls pushbutton panels - item 308002 - 308012
dimensions: W 180 x H 330 mm
Wall mounted box - item 308022 : W 178 x H 327 x D 40 mm
Flush mounted box (supplied): W 128 x H 260 x P 53 mm

21 - 32 calls pushbutton panels - item 308005 - 308015
dimensions: W 340 x H 370 mm
Wall mounted box - item 308025 : W 338 x H 367 x D 40 mm
Flush mounted box (supplied): W 310 x H 328 x P 53 mm

9 - 12 calls pushbutton panels - item 308003 - 308013
dimensions: W 180 x H 360 mm
Wall mounted box - item 308023 : W 178 x H 357 x D 40 mm
Flush mounted box (supplied): W 128 x H 310 x P 53 mm

264 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

308001 - 308002
308003 - 308004 - 308005 - 308011
308012 - 308013 - 308014 - 308015
Configuration

Rear view

The device must be physically configured as follows:

P
TS

USB

J2
J1

9
8

1
2
3
4

2 1

BUS PL S+ S−

5
6

P - entrance panel number
The configurator connected to the P housing of the speaker module assigns to the same
an identification number within the system.
The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0. The EP configured
with P=0 must be a common (or main) EP.
N - call number
It assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel call keys and the handsets or
video handsets. In common entrance panels made using key modules, N in the speaker
module must be configured with 0. In local entrance panels, the first handset or video
handset of the riser being called will be the one configured with N+1 in relation to the
entrance panel.
T - door lock relay timing
configurator number
0= No
configurator

Legend

1. Microphone volume adjustment
2. Loudspeaker volume adjustment
3. USB connector for connection to the PC
4. J2: NOT USED
5. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps
6. Clamps for the connection of the door lock and the room door opening pushbutton
7. Additional power supply connection clamps
8. Configurator socket
9. J1: remove to enable additional power supply

4 sec.

1 sec. 2 sec.

3 sec.

as
6 sec.
pushbutton

8 sec. 10 sec.

* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. maximum after which it goes in stand-by.

In order to extend this type of operation over 10 seconds, use the actuator,
item 346200 configured with MOD=5.
S – call signal type WITH handset door lock release notification BEEP
The configuration of S sets the SPRINT handset call ringtone.
In this way, it is possible to differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
SPRING handsets call signal table

Configurator
Type of bell

Camera installation notes

0
Double-tone
1200 Hz
600 Hz

1
Double-tone
1200 Hz
0 Hz

2
Double-tone
1200 Hz
2400 Hz

3
One-tone
1200 Hz

In the case of SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the S configurator associates
the entrance panel to the ringtone programmed inside the same. It is possible to choose
among 16 different ringtones.
S – call signal type WITHOUT handset door lock release notification BEEP
The configuration of S sets the SPRINT handset call ringtone.
In this way, it is possible to differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
Tabella per segnale di chiamata posti interni SPRINT

Configurator
Type of bell

4
Double-tone
1200 Hz
600 Hz

5
Double-tone
1200 Hz
0 Hz

6
Double-tone
1200 Hz
2400 Hz

7
One-tone
1200 Hz

BT00631-a -EN

The camera must not be installed facing strong light sources, or in locations where the
area being shot is strongly backlit. In order to resolve these problems, we recommend
that the camera is installed at a height of 180 cm, instead of the usual 160-165 cm, with
the lens pointing down. This will improve image quality.
In low light situations, the colour rendition of the image displayed by the colour camera
may decrease. This is to ensure that the person being displayed can be better recognised.
For optimal viewing in low lit rooms, the installation of an additional light source is
recommended.

2 WIRE VDE system 265

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Universal speaker unit
and pushbutton expansion

346991 - 346992

Description
346991
3
346991
P

N S

BUS

2
1
C
N+8
N+9

N+15

2 1 C
IN

Technical data

346992

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Max. operating absorption:
Stand by absorption:
Operating temperature:

OUT

18-27 Vdc
65 mA
15 mA
(-25)-(+70)°C
Legend

Dimensional data
26 mm

55 mm

90 mm

BT00632-a -EN

266 2 WIRE VDE system

Item 346991:
1 - Clamps for the connection of the 2 WIRE BUS
2 - Item 346992 connector socket
3 - Configurator socket
(C) common pushbuttons
(1-8) connection of call pushbuttons
Clamps item 346992:
(C) common pushbuttons
(1-8) connection of call pushbuttons

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 C

The universal speaker unit can be used to install the 2 WIRE audio system in new or
refurbished systems, where special pushbutton panels are present or required (mail
boxes, patterned brass, monobloc laminates, etc.) preset for a traditional type speaker
module (e.g. 2659N). The universal speaker unit has a set of clamps for the connection of
8 call pushbuttons. In systems with more than 8 call pushbuttons, one item 346992 must
be added for every 8 pushbuttons (max. 56); For the connection, the multicable with 2
connectors supplied with item 346992 must be used.
Microphone sensitivity adjustment and loudspeaker volume using dedicated
potentiometers. For the control of an electric door lock, an actuator item 346230/346260
appropriately configured must be used.
The microphone of the speaker unit may be disconnected from the device and positioned
at a distance of 15 cm (max.).
In video systems, the device must be used together with native 2 WIRE cameras or
camera with coaxial output using interface item 347400.

max. dist. ≤ 3 m

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346991 - 346992
Configuration
N – call number
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons, and the audio
handsets.
In common entrance panels made using pushbutton modules, 1 must be inserted in N of
the speaker module. In secondary entrance panels, the number of the first riser handset
must be inserted in N.
P – entrance panel number
The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.

S – type of call signal
The configuration of S determines the call tone of SPRINT handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
Table for SPRINT handset call signal
Configurator
Type of bell

0
2-tone
1200Hz
600Hz

1
2-tone
1200Hz
0 Hz

2
2-tone
1200Hz
2400Hz

3
One-tone
1200Hz

For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the S configurator associates the
entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems, S=9 configures the general call and
the handsets ring, the same as with the S=0.
call sound volume adjustment
Configurator
8
3
Type of bell
max.
min.

0
excluded
call confirmation

BT00632-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 267

TECHNICAL SHEETS

AXOLUTE
Nighter & Whice VIDEO STATION

349320 - 349321

Description
2-wire speaker phone video handset for wall mounted installation. With 8” colour LCD
display, backlit capacitive keypad with soft touch controls and PC customisable OSD
navigation icon menu for the management of the following MY HOME applications:
video door entry system, temperature control, sound system and multimedia,
automation (scenarios) and anti-intrusion.
In systems integrated with the sound system, the VIDEO STATION behaves as an
amplifier, enabling playback of all audio/video sources connected to the system.
LED signalling for: call exclusion, door status, and connection to the entrance panel.
It can be integrated with MY HOME, also in combination with the Multimedia interface,
item 3465 - (in this case, allow for a local video door entry system power supply).
Suitable for wall mounted installation using the special bracket (supplied as standard).
Programming and configuration using the TiNighterandWhiceStation software supplied
with the product.

2
3

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
30 mA
520 mA
5 - 40°C

Front view
Legend
1 - 8“ LCD colour display
2 - Microphone
3 - Navigation keys and confirmation inside the menu
4 - Led and video door entry function keys

Dimensional data

230 mm

25 mm

305 mm

Rear view

1
2

6
5
3

BT00633-a -EN

268 2 WIRE VDE system

Legend
1 - Configurator socket
2 - Mini-USB connector for PC connection
3 - Loudpspeakers; for the broadcasting of voice and stereo sound
4 - Screw used to fasten the Video Station to the metal base
5 - Additional power supply connection clamps
6 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire SCS BUS
7 - Line termination ON/OFF micro switch

TECHNICAL SHEETS

349320 - 349321
Configuration
AXOLUTE Nighter & Whice VIDEO STATION can be configured in 2 different modes:
- Fast configuration (through the connection of physical configurators)
- Advanced configuration using the TiAxoluteNighterAndWhiceStation
software (CD supplied)
Fast configuration enables the user to access the menu of the video door entry functions.
This is the standard configuration using configurators to be connected to the appropriate
housing on the back of the device itself.
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed in the apartment, configuration of the
video handset using the software supplied is recommended.

The advanced PC configuration using the TiAxoluteNighterAndwhiceStation
software (CD supplied), provides the user with a higher degree of customisation, with
the possibility to:
- create flexible menus
- customize text messages
- access all home automation functions

To transfer the configuration performed using the
TiAxoluteNighterAndwhiceStation software, or to update the firmware,
connect Axolute Video Station to the PC using the USB-mini cable.

WARNING
The device configuration made using configurators
CANNOT BE MODIFIED from the software.
BUS

To ensure that communication is successful, Axolute Video Station
must be powered and not configured physically.

N - handset number
The N configurator assigns each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive mode. Handsets with parallel
connection (max 3 are allowed inside the apartment without item 346850) must be
configured with the same N configurator. Additional audio handsets, video handsets
and/or bells can be installed in parallel to the basic video handset.

M - Operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu of the device and therefore all the usable
functions (see manual supplied with the product).

BT00633-a -EN

P - entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the associated EP, or the first entrance panel that switches
itself on when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed the first time, as well as which door lock
with idle video hanset is activated, when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed.

2 WIRE VDE system 269

TECHNICAL SHEETS

AXOLUTE
VIDEO STATION

349310

Description
2-wire speaker phone video handset for wall mounted installation.
With 5.6” colour LCD display with PC customisable OSD navigation icon menu for
the management of the following MY HOME applications: video door entry system,
temperature control, sound system, automation (scenarios) and anti-intrusion.
In systems integrated with the sound system, the VIDEO STATION behaves as an amplifier,
enabling playback of all audio/video sources connected to the system.
LED signalling for: call exclusion, door status, and connection to the entrance panel.
Suitable for wall mounted installation using the special bracket (supplied as standard).
Programming and configuration using the TiAxoluteStation software supplied with the
product.

10
4

Related items

349210 - Surround plate (satin-finished aluminium)
349211 - Surround plate (KRISTALL glass)
349212 - Surround plate (TEAK wood)

Front view

Legend
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

1 - 5.6” colour LCD display
2 - Navigation keypad and confirmation inside the menu
3 - Loudpspeakers; for the diffusion of voice and stereo sound
4 - Connection key; enable/disable the connection
5 - Microphone
6 - Connection status LED
7 - LED for call exclusion notification
8 - Door lock status LED
9 - Door lock opening key
10 - Keys for video door entry functions

18 – 27 Vdc
10 mA
410 mA
5 - 40°C

Dimensional data

257 mm

307 mm

161 mm

1
2

226 mm
105,5 mm

35
120,5 mm

140 mm

BT00634-a -EN

165 mm

Rear view

270 2 WIRE VDE system

Legend
1 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire SCS BUS
2 - Configurator socket
3 - Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
4 - Mini-USB connector for PC connection
5 - Additional power supply connection clamps

TECHNICAL SHEETS

349310
Configuration
AXOLUTE VIDEO STATION can be configured in 2 different modes:
- Fast configuration (through the connection of physical configurators)
- Advanced configuration using the TiAxoluteStation software supplied with the
product.
Fast configuration enables the user to access the menu of the video door entry
functions. This is the standard configuration using configurators to be connected to the
appropriate socket on the back of the device itself.
Warning: If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed in the apartment,
configuration of the video handset using the software supplied is recommended.

The advanced PC configuration using the TiAxolutestation software (CD supplied),
provides the user with a higher degree of customisation, with the possibility to:
- create flexible menus
- customize text messages
- access all home automation functions

To transfer the configuration performed using the TiAxolutestation software,
or to update the firmware, connect Axolute Video Station to the PC using the
USB-mini cable.

USB-miniUSB

To ensure that communication is successful, Axolute Video Station
must be powered and not physically configured.

WARNING
The device configuration
made using configurators
CANNOT BE MODIFIED using
the software.

P M

P - entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the associated EP, or the first entrance panel that switches
itself on when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed the first time, as well as which door lock
with idle video handset is activated, when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed.

BT00634-a -EN

M - Operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu of the device and therefore all the usable
preset functions (see manual supplied with the product).

2 WIRE VDE system 271

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Multimedia Touch Screen

HC/HS 4690

Description

Front view

Multimedia Touch Screen is a device that enables controlling all the functions of the
MY HOME system by means of simple and intuitive icons displayed on the 10” 16:9 LCD
Touch Screen.
In addition to the management of the automation functions, lights, temperature
control, sound system, burglar alarm, and scenarios, by using the device it is also
possible to answer to video door entry system calls, and display the images transmitted
by the entrance panel, or the connected cameras. Thanks to the USB device and SD card
inputs, Multimedia Touch Screen can manage multimedia files, allowing the users to
listen to their favourite music or to view films and images.
When integrated with a domestic LAN network with internet connection, the device
enables (following the activation of specific icons) receiving RSS services such as “news”
and weather information, displaying images transmitted through webcams, and
listening to internet radio channels.

Related items

Surround plate:
Power supply:

HA4690XC, HA4690VBB, HA4690LTK, HA4690VNB, HA4690VSW
346020

Rear view

6 7 8 9 10 11

Technical data

18 – 27 Vdc
18 – 27 Vdc
600 mA
50 mA
5 – 45 °C

PSTN

BUS

2 1

ETH

13
Dimensional data

OFF

15 14

Legend

1. 10” Touch Screen colour LED display
2. Microphone
17 mm

305 mm

3. USB connection
4. Mini USB PC connection
5. SD card connector
6. Sound system source output connector
7. RJ45 connector for Ethernet connection
8. LAN connection signalling LED

BT00635-a -EN

228 mm

9. PSTN telephone line connector (future application)
10. 2 wire video BUS/SCS connector
11. 1-2 power supply connector
12. End of line ON/OFF micro switch
13. Loudspeaker
14. Bracket fixing screw
15. Factory configuration reset pushbutton
16. NiMh 7.2 V battery compartment; 160 mAh
17. RS232 PC connector

272 2 WIRE VDE system

SCS AUDIO OUT

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Local power supply (1 – 2):
Max. local absorption (1 – 2):
Absorption from SCS BUS:
Operating temperature:

TECHNICAL SHEETS

HC/HS 4690
Configuration

Multimedia Touch Screen must be configured using the TiMultimediaTouchScreen
software supplied as standard. In order to receive/transfer the configuration performed,
or to update the firmware, connect Multimedia Touch Screen to the PC using one of the
three solutions:
- USB-miniUSB cable;
- serial connector (3559);
- Ethernet cable.
USB connection

Ethernet connection

Serial connection

PSTN

BUS

2 1

ON
OFF

SCS AUDIO OUT

OFF

SCS AUDIO OUT

3559

ETH

BT00635-a -EN

Switch

2 WIRE VDE system 273

TECHNICAL SHEETS

HC/HS 4690
Wiring diagram

Ethernet cable

230 Vac

PSTN

BUS

2 1
PR I

346020
PRI: 220 - 240 V~
175 - 165 mA
47 / 63 Hz

F441M
Multichannel matrix

1-2

346020
Power supply

Audio SCS BUS

BT00635-a -EN

274 2 WIRE VDE system

SCS AUDIO OUT

1-2: 27 Vdc
600 mA

ETH

TECHNICAL SHEETS

HC/HS 4690
Installation

Before fixing the device to the wall apply the surround plate item HA4690...

HA4690...

Connect Multimedia Touch Screen to the system and fix it to the wall using the bracket
supplied with the product.

To complete the installation rotate the fixing screws at the back of Multimedia Touch
Screen clockwise.

BT00635-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 275

TECHNICAL SHEETS

AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY

349311 - 349312 - 349313

Description
2-wire speaker phone video handset for flush mounted installation. With 2.5” colour LCD
display with PC customisable OSD navigation icon menu for the management of the
following MY HOME applications: video door entry system, temperature control, sound
system, automation (scenarios) and anti-intrusion. LED signalling for: call exclusion,
door status, and connection to the entrance panel.
Suitable for flush mounted installation using item 506 boxes. To be completed with front
cover plate (all those suitable for item 506E of the AXOLUTE series).
Programming and configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied with the
product.

1
10
9

Related items
506E
PB526
HA/HB4826...
349319

2
3
4

3+3 modules flush mounted box
3+3 modules plasterboard box
3+3 modules front cover plate (see AXOLUTE finishes)
VIDEO DISPLAY table-top base

Technical data

Front view

7 6 5

Legend

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
10 mA
320 mA
5 - 40°C

1 - 2.5” colour LCD display
2 - Loudspeaker
3 - LED for call exclusion notification
4 - Connection key; enable/disable the connection
5 - Connection status LED
6 - Entrance panel and cycling activation key
7 - Door lock status LED
8 - Tasto Door lock opening
9 - Navigation keys and confirmation inside the menu
10 - Microphone

Dimensional data
105,5 mm

118 mm

2,5”

9,5 mm

1
2
30,2 mm

AXOLUTE

127 mm

1 2

BUS
OFF

141,5 mm

BT00636-a -EN

Rear view

Legend
Maximum space requirement with front cover plate

276 2 WIRE VDE system

1 - Mini-USB connector for PC connection
2 - Configurator socket
3 - 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps
4 - Line termination ON/OFF micro switch
5 - Clamp for connection of the additional power supply

TECHNICAL SHEETS

349311 - 349312 - 349313
Configuration
AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY can be configured in 2 different modes:
- Fast configuration (through the connection of physical configurators)
- Advanced configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied with the
product.
Fast configuration enables the user to access the menu of the video door entry
functions. This is the standard configuration using configurators to be connected to the
appropriate sockets on the back of the device itself.
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed in the apartment, configuration of
the video handset using the software supplied is recommended.

The advanced PC configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software (CD supplied),
provides the user with a higher degree of customisation, with the possibility to:
- create customized menus;
- customize text messages;
- access all home automation functions.
To transfer the configuration performed using the TiAxoluteDisplay software, or to
update the firmware, connect AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY to the PC using an USB-miniUSB
cable.

WARNING: The configuration of the device is performed using configurators and
cannot be changed from the menu.

BUS

P M

To ensure that the communication is successful, AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY must be
powered and not physically configured.

M - Operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu of the device and therefore all the usable
functions (see manual supplied with the product).

BT00636-a -EN

P - entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the associated EP, or the first entrance panel that switches
itself on when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed the first time, as well as which door lock
with idle video handset is activated, when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed.

2 WIRE VDE system 277

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Axolute Etèris Video Display
Description

Front view

2 WIRE speaker phone video handset for flush mounted installation. With 2.5” colour
LCD display with PC customisable icons OSD navigation menu for the management of
the following MY HOME applications: Video door entry system, temperature control,
sound system, scenarios, burglar alarm. LED signalling for: call exclusion, door status,
connection with entrance panel. Flush mounted / plasterboard installation using the
appropriate boxes.
To be completed with dedicated front cover and front cover plate available in the Axolute
white, anthracite, and tech colour variants. Programming and configuration using the
TiAxoluteMemoryDisplay software supplied with the product.

Related items

528W
PB528W
349243
349241
349242
HW4826HD
HW4826HC
HW4826HS
346020

349340

2
3
4

Flush mounted box
Plasterboard box
White front cover
Axolute tech front cover
Anthracite front cover
White front cover plate
Axolute tech front cover plate
Tech front cover plate
(additional 2 DIN modules power supply) - optional, for local powering of
the video handset, when maximum installation distances are necessary.

7 6 5
Back view

11
12

Technical data

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand-by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
10 mA
320 mA
0 – 40 °C

Dimensional data
Legend

128 mm

29 mm

1. 2.5 “ LCD colour display
2. Loudspeaker
3. Bell exclusion notification LED
4. Audio connection activation/deactivation key
5. Connection status LED
6. Entrance panel/camera scrolling activation key

BT00637-a -EN

7. Door lock status LED
8. Door lock activation key

128 mm

9. Navigation and confirmation keys in the icon menu
10. Microphone
11. Mini USB connector for connection to the PC
12. Configurator socket
31 mm

13. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps
14. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
15. Additional power supply connection clamps (1-2)

278 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

349340
Flush mounted box 528W

Plasterboard box PB528W
128,5 mm

116,5 mm

58 mm

TOP TOP

TOP

128,5 mm

116,5 mm
TOP

58 mm

TOP TOP

Configuration

Axolute Etèris Video Display can be configured in two different modes:
- Quick configuration (with physical configurator connection)
- Advanced configuration (using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied)
The quick configuration enables the user to access the video door entry system function
menu. This is the standard configuration with configurators to be connected to their
own housing on the back of the device itself.
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed inside the apartment, configuration
of the video handset using the software supplied is recommended.

The PC advanced configuration using the software (CD supplied), provides the user with
the highest degree of customisation, with the possibility of:
- create customized menus;
- customize text messages;
- access all home automation functions.
Connection to the PC
To transfer the configuration performed using the software, or to update the firmware,
connect Axolute Etèris Video Display to the PC using the USB-miniUSB cable.

3
2

BT00637-a -EN

N – handset number
The N configurator assigns to each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order.Handsets with parallel
connection (max 3 are allowed inside apartments without item 346850) must be
configured using the same N configurator. In parallel with the main video handset,
additional handsets, video handsets and/or bells may be installed.
P – entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the entrance panel associated, or the first entrance panel
and which door lock is activated when the key
to activate before pressing the key
is pressed while the video handset is idle.
M – operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu page and therefore the preset functions
that may be used (see manual supplied with the product).

USB-miniUSB

To ensure that the communication is successful, the video handset must
be powered and not physically configured.

2 WIRE VDE system 279

TECHNICAL SHEETS

LIVINGLIGHT VIDEO DISPLAY
Description

Front view

2-WIRE hands free video handsets for flush mounted installation or in FLATWALL
column. 2.5” colour LCD display with PC customisable OSD navigation icon menu for the
management of the following applications: video door entry system, temperature control,
sound system, scenarios and anti-intrusion. Signalling LEDs for: call exclusion, door status,
and connection to the entrance panel. Firmware update/programming USB port. Suitable
for flush mounted installation using item 506E boxes. To be completed with dedicated
front covers and LIVINGLIGHT front cover plates. Programming and configuration using the
TiLivingLightDisplay software supplied with the product.

10
9

Related items
506E
344413
344411
344412
LNA4826...
LNB4826...
LNC4826...

344400 - 344401

3+3 modules flush mounted box
LIVINGLIGHT front cover - White
LIVINGLIGHT front cover - Tech
LIVINGLIGHT front cover - Anthracite
Front cover plate, 3+3 modules, square (see LIVINGLIGHT finishes)
Front cover plate, 3+3 modules, elliptical (see LIVINGLIGHT finishes)
Front cover plate, 3+3 modules, AIR (see LIVINGLIGHT AIR finishes)

3
8

Rear view

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

2
4

7 6 5

18 – 27 Vdc
10 mA
320 mA
0 – 40 °C

11
12

Dimensional data

344400

106 mm

10,5 mm

2,5”
117 mm

Legend

344401

31 mm
119 mm

5 mm

BT00638-a -EN

2,5”
121 mm

31 mm

280 2 WIRE VDE system

1. 2.5” colour LCD display
2. Loudspeaker
3. Bell exclusion notification LED
4. Audio connection activation / deactivation key
5. Connection status LED
6. Entrance panel / camera cycling activation key
7. Door lock status LED
8. Door lock activation key
9. Navigation keys and confirmation inside the icon menu
10. Microphone
11. Mini-USB connector for PC connection
12. Configurator socket
13. Clamps for the connection of the 2-WIRE SCS BUS
14. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
15. Additional power supply connection clamps (1 - 2)

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344400 - 344401
Configuration

LIVINGLIGHT VIDEO DISPLAY can be configured in 2 different modes:
- Fast configuration (through the connection of physical configurators)
- Advanced configuration (using the TiLivingLightDisplay software supplied with
the product).
Fast configuration enables the user to access the menu of the video door entry
functions. This is the standard configuration using configurators to be connected to
the appropriate socket on the back of the device itself. If the apartment interface, item
346850, is installed in the apartment, configuration of the video handset using the
software supplied is recommended.

The advanced PC configuration using the software (CD supplied), provides the user
with a higher degree of customisation, with the possibility to:
- create flexible menus
- customize text messages
- access all home automation functions.
Connection to the PC
To transfer the configuration performed using the software, or to update the firmware,
connect LIVINGLIGHT VIDEO DISPLAY to the PC using the USB-mini cable.

WARNING: The device configuration made using configurators CANNOT BE MODIFIED
using the menu.

3
2

USB-miniUSB

M - operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu of the device and therefore all the usable
preset functions (see manual supplied with the product).

BUS

To ensure that communication is successful, the video handset must be
powered and NOT physically configured.

BT00638-a -EN

P - entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the associated EP, or the first entrance panel that switches
itself on when the pushbutton
is pressed the first time, as well as which door lock
with idle video handset is activated, when the pushbutton
is pressed.

2 WIRE VDE system 281

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Polyx Memory Display

344163

Description

Front view

2 WIRE wall mounted speaker phone video handset with audio and video memory.
With 3.5” colour LCD display with PC customisable icons OSD navigation menu for
the management of the following MY HOME applications: Video door entry system,
temperature control, sound system, scenarios, burglar alarm. With video door entry
system answering machine with call memory function.
LED signalling for: call exclusion, door status, connection with entrance panel, and
answering machine status. It can be wall mounted using the appropriate bracket
(supplied).
Programming and configuration using the TiPolyxMemoryDisplay software supplied
with the product.

2
3
11
10
9

Related items

4
5

346020 (additional 2 DIN modules power supply) - optional, for local powering of the
video handset, when maximum installation distances are necessary.

Back view
Technical data

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand-by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
10 mA
330 mA
0 - 40 °C

17
16

Dimensional data

168 mm

30 mm

Legend

150 mm

BT00639-a -EN

282 2 WIRE VDE system

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.

Microphone
3.5 “ LCD colour display
Navigation and confirmation keys in the icon menu
Entrance panel/camera scrolling activation key
Audio connection activation/deactivation key
Connection status LED
Loudspeaker
Door lock status LED
Door lock activation key
Audio video answering machine status LED
Answering machine key: enable/disable the answering machine function
(if enabled by the menu)
Bell exclusion notification LED
Mini USB connector for connection to the PC
Configurator socket
Additional power supply connector (1-2)
Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection

13
14
15

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344163
Configuration

Polyx Memory Display can be configured in two different modes:
- Quick configuration (with physical configurator connection);
- Advanced configuration (using the TiPolyxMemoryDisplay software supplied).
The quick configuration enables the user to access the video door entry system function
menu. This is the standard configuration with configurators to be connected to their
own housing on the back of the device itself.
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed inside the apartment, configuration
of the video handset using the software supplied is recommended.

Connection to the PC
To transfer the configuration performed using the TiPolyxMemoryDisplay software
or to update the firmware, connect POLYX MEMORY DISPLAY to the PC using the
USB-miniUSB cable.

USB-miniUSB

P – entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the entrance panel associated, or the first entrance panel
to activate before pressing the key
and which door lock is activated when the key
is pressed while the video handset is idle.

BT00639-a -EN

M – operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu page and therefore the preset functions
that may be used (see manual supplied with the product).

To ensure that the communication is successful, the POLYX MEMORY DISPLAY must
be powered and not physically configured.

2 WIRE VDE system 283

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Inductive LOOP module

344165

Description

2 WIRE inductive LOOP module to be used with Polyx Memory Display 344163 video
handset, to enable use by people wearing hearing aids (fitted with T selector).
The device must be configured with the same address (N) of the corresponding video
handset. Wall mounted installation without the need of accessories.

WARNING: The inductive loop module must only be activated AFTER establishing the connection of the associated video handset to the entrance panel.
Technical data

Power supply dal SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
5 mA
200 mA
5 - 40 °C

Dimensional data

24,5 mm

88 mm

122 mm

3
4

8
ON

OFF

ON OFF

Configuration

Legend

1. Activation key

2. Status signalling LED:

green flashing = call notification

green steady = connection established

3. Configurator socket

BT00640-a -EN

4. Jumper, to be removed to enable additional power supply connection
5. Additional power supply connection clamps
N = associated video handset number
The N configurator assign to the device the same number of the handset of the associated video handset (configure with the same N of the video handset).
(*) = Not used

284 2 WIRE VDE system

6. Microphone
7. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
8. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Audio
POLYX

344082

Description

2 WIRE handsfree handset for wall mounted installation.
It’s fitted with keys for: EP activation/cycling, door lock release, staircase light switching
on and 4 programmable keys, which operating mode is set through the configuration.
Specific audible and visual signals mean that it is also suitable for use by disabled people.
Fixing bracket supplied.

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
5 mA
55 mA
5 - 40°C

Dimensional data

30 mm

Front

BUS

OFF

128 mm

124,5 mm

5 1

P M

ART.344082

Rear view
Legend

BT00641-a -EN

1 - Call signalling LED
2 - Loudspeaker
3 - Staircase light key
4 - Loudspeaker volume adjustment
5 - Connection key+ LED
6 - Microphone
7 - Door lock key + LED
8 - Bell volume adjustment and exclusion + LED
9 - EP Activation/cycling
10 - 4 programmable keys (through configuration)
11 - Clamps for the connection to the 2 WIRE BUS
12 - Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
13 - Configurator socket
14 - Clamps for the connection of the Floor call auxiliary services and extra bell

2 WIRE VDE system 285

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344082
Configuration
N - handset number
Assigns to each handset an identification number within the system. The handsets
must be configured in progressive order. Handsets with parallel connection (max 3 are
allowed inside apartments without item 346850) must be configured using the same
N configurator.
P - entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the associated EP, or the first entrance panel on which the
audio is activated when the ( ) key is pressed, as well as which door lock is activated
when the key
is pressed while the handset is idle.
M - Operating mode of the keys
In addition to the door lock opening key
and the staircase light key ( ), the
handset also has 4 programmable keys ( - - - ).
These keys may be associated to different operating modes (e.g. activation of external
actuators, intercom, activation of additional EPs, etc., based on the type of configurator
connected to M).

BT00641-a -EN

286 2 WIRE VDE system

Configurator in P
0-9

key ( ) function
Entrance panel audio activation
(configured with P=0-9)

Configurator in P
0-9

key
function
Opening of the EP door lock
(configured with P=0-9)

The handset offers the possibility to select among 16 types of bells with pre-programmed
ringtones, which can be associated to the following type of calls:
- Calls from the entrance panel (configured with S=0 - S=4)
- Calls from the entrance panel (configured with S=0 - S=5)
- Intercom call
- Floor call
(See the bell programming table in the following pages)

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344082
Configuration
Below are the various operating modes that can be assigned to the 4 programmable keys:
MODE

KEY

FUNCTION

NOTES

MOD =

1 Intercom on itself, it sends the call to all handsets with the same address.
activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the
2 EP
actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)
EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of the

4 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5), or activation of door lock
actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+2)

MOD =

1
1 Intercom on itself, it sends the call to all handsets with the same address.

inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
2 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=1

N=2 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=1

N=3 N=2

N=1 N=3

N=1

N=2 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=2

activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the
3 EP
actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)
EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

4 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

MOD =

2
inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
1 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door

N=2

BT00641-a-EN

inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
2 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=1

lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of

4 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+2)

2 WIRE VDE system 287

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344082
MODE
MOD =

KEY

FUNCTION

3
inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
1 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
2 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
3 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
4 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

MOD =

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of

4 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+2)

N=1

N=5 N=2

N=1 N=3

N=1 N=4

N=1 N=5

N=1

N=2 N=2

N=5 N=3

N=2 N=4

N=2 N=5

N =1

N =3 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=5 N=4

N=3 N=5

N=1

N=4 N=2

N=4 N=3

N=4 N=4

N=5 N=5

N=1

N=2 N=2

activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the
1 EP
actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)

inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
2 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

MOD =

NOTES

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

1 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

BT00641-a -EN

EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of

2 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+2)

EP door lock release (configured with P+3), directly, without call, or activation of

3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+3 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+3)

EP door lock release (configured with P+4), directly, without call, or activation of

4 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+4 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+4)

288 2 WIRE VDE system

N=1

N=2

N=3

N=4

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344082
MODE

KEY

MOD =

FUNCTION

1 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 1)

2 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 2)

3
4
7

MOD =

NOTES

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of
the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)
EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of
the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+2)
N=1

N=3 N=2

N=1 N=3

N=1

N=2 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=1

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,

1 or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=2

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,

2 or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

MOD =

3 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 1)

4 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 2)

1 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 1)

2 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 2)

3 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 3)

4 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 4)

1 General Intercom, sends a call to all the handsets of the system.
EP activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the

2 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
4
MOD =

lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)
EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of
the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+2)
N=1

12
1 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

2 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

BT00641-a-EN

N=2

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
4

2 WIRE VDE system 289

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344082
MODE
MOD =

KEY

FUNCTION

NOTES
N=1

13
1 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

N=2

2 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

N=3

3 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

N=4

4 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

MOD =

1 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 1)

2 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 2)

3 General Intercom, sends a call to all the handsets of the system.
EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

4 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

BT00641-a -EN

290 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344082
Configuration

20 = B
40 = C
60 = D
80 = E

A Configuration selected for the operation of the keys (see previous pages)
B Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + OFFICE function
C Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + PAGING function
D Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + HANDSFREE function (Can be activated only on a single device for each unit system)
E Configuration selected for the operation of the keys, OFFICE and PAGING function

BT00641-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 291

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344082
OFFICE FUNCTION DETAIL
With the function active, when a call is received from
the entrance panel, the video handset rings and the
associated door lock is automatically released, without
the need for pressing the door lock release key on the
handset.

To ENABLE the function

Led ON
Led ON

BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP

>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
Led ON
Led ON
Led ON
Led ON

To DISABLE the function

BT00641-a -EN

>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
WARNING: the “OFFICE” function cannot be activated together with the “DOOR STATUS” function.

292 2 WIRE VDE system

BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP

CLAK

EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344082
DOOR Status function
This function notifies the status of the door lock. If open, the “door lock LED” flashes, if
closed, the LED stays off.
NOTA: è attivabile solo se l’impianto lo prevede; NON è attivabile contemporaneamente
alla OFFICE function.
PAGING function
This function can be used to send voice messages using the microphone of the device
through the speakers of the sound system. To activate briefly press the ”Connection” key
while the device is in the idle condition. The activation of the function is confirmed by the
green LED coming on. To DISABLE the function press the ”Connection” key again.

PUSH TO TALK function
If the entrance panel is in a particularly noisy position, during the conversation it will
be possible to enable the “PUSH TO TALK” function, which will provide a better quality
of communication.
To enable the PUSH TO TALK function during the conversation proceed as follows:
- Press the Connection key for at least 2 seconds, to enable the communication with the
entrance panel.
The LED stays green.
- Release the key to listen to the entrance panel. The LED turns red.
- To end the connection press the Connection key briefly. The LED turns off.

HANDSFREE function
The HANDSFREE function automatically activates the microphone and the loudspeaker
when a call is received, without the need for pressing the Connection key to answer (the
connection is automatically established when the call is received).
To ENABLE the function

BEEP
BEEP

EXIT
EXIT

BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP

EXIT
EXIT

>3s
>3s
To DISABLE the function

>3s
>3s
Enable/disable key sound
In the base configuration, when a key is pressed, a beep is emitted. This function may be
disabled/enabled with the following procedure:

BEEP
BEEP

To ENABLE the function

BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP

To DISABLE the function

BT00641-a -EN

>3s
>3s

>3s
>3s
2 WIRE VDE system 293

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344082
Programming of bells
Bell selection from MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL (S=0)

>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
Bell selection from SECONDARY ENTRANCE
PANEL (S=1)
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
INTERCOM CALL bell selection
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s

>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
EXTERNAL INTERCOM CALL bell selection
>3s
(only with interface item 346850) >3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s

BT00641-a -EN

FLOOR CALL bell selection

>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s

>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s

294 2 WIRE VDE system

1
1
11
11
111
11
1
1
111
1
111
112
1111
112111
12
11122
11221
112222
1
1122
1
21222
2
21222
23
2222
22322
23
22233
223322
22333
23
2233
2
32333
32333
3
333433
33344
33344
33443
4
33344
33444
3
4444
34
4344
44444
4
44
444
444
4
44
4
44
4
44

1
1
121
21
2121
12
16
1
16
12221
17
16
16
1121
17
1212
17
1
17
2112
17
212
17
2
2121
17
17
17
221
17
112
17
17
2
17
1
17
2
17
1
17
2211
16
17
17
112
16
211122
16
16
17
211
212
17
2
211
17
17
17
2221
17
171222
17
17
1712
17
121
17
17
17
12
17
17
1
211122
17
16
17
211
16
222111
16
21
17
16
22211
17
2
17
212
17
17
1721
17
121
17
17
17
12
17
17
1
211122
17
17
2121
17
22111
17
2
16
17
22211
16
17
212
16
17
16
1721
17
121
17
17
17
112
17
1212
17
17
1
212
17
221
17
17
2
17
22
17
16
17
17
16
16
16

OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT

EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT

TECHNICAL SHEETS

POLYX
handsfree video handset

344192

Description

2 WIRE handsfree video handset for wall mounted installation.
With 3.5” colour LCD dislay.
Keys available: auto-switching on, door lock release, staircase lights, handsfree
connection, and four programmable keys.
Signalling LED for call exclusion, door status, connection with the entrance panel.
It can be wall mounted using the appropriate bracket (supplied).
P

BUS

5
1

1
2

ON
OFF

Technical data

ART.344182

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
5 mA
320 mA
5 - 40°C

Dimensional data

Front view

8
13

30 mm

BUS

5
1

150 mm

168 mm

1
2

ON
OFF

ART.344182

Rear view

Legend

BT00642-a -EN

1 - 4 Programmable keys (through configuration)
2 - 3.5” colour LCD display
3 - Entrance panel/cycling key
4 - Microphone
5 - Staircase light switching on key
6 - Loudspeaker volume adjustment
7 - Connection key + LED
8 - Brightness adjustment
9 - Loudspeaker
10 - Display colour adjustment
11 - Door lock key + LED
12 - Bell adjustment and exclusion (LED)
13 - Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
14 - Configurator socket
15 - Jumper J2 - MASTER/SLAVE (remove to enable SLAVE)
16 - Jumper J1 - remove to enable additional power supply
17 - Additional power supply connection clamps
18 - Clamps for the connection of floor call auxiliary services and extra bell
19 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire SCS BUS

2 WIRE VDE system 295

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344192
Configuration

The device must be only physically configured.

P M

N – handset number
The N configurator assigns each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order. The handsets must be
configured in progressive mode. Handsets with parallel connection (max 3 are allowed
inside the apartment without item 346850) must be configured with the same N
configurator. Additional audio handsets, video handsets and/or bells can be installed in
parallel to the basic video handset.
P – entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the associated EP, or the first entrance panel that switches
itself on when the pushbutton is pressed the first time, as well as which door lock with
idle video handset is activated, when the pushbutton is pressed.
M – operating mode
The M configurator assigns the operating mode to the 4 programmable keys following
the indications of the following pages.

BT00642-a -EN

296 2 WIRE VDE system

The video handset offers the possibility to select among 16 types of bells with
programmed ringtones, which can be freely associated to the following type of calls:
- Calls from the entrance panel (configured with S=0)
- Calls from the entrance panel (configured with S=1)
- Intercom call
- Floor call
(See the bell programming table in the following pages)

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344192
Configuration
Below are the various operating modes that can be assigned to the 4 programmable keys:
MODE

KEY

FUNCTION

NOTES

MOD =

3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of

4 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+2)

MOD =

1
1 Intercom on itself, it sends the call to all handsets with the same address.

inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
2 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=1

N=2 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=1

N=3 N=2

N=1 N=3

N=1

N=2 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=2

4 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

MOD =

2
inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
1 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

N=2

BT00642-a-EN

inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
2 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=1

3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of

4 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+2)

2 WIRE VDE system 297

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344192
MODE
MOD =

KEY

FUNCTION

3
inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
1 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
2 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
3 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
4 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

MOD =

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of

4 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+2)

N=1

N=5 N=2

N=1 N=3

N=1 N=4

N=1 N=5

N=1

N=2 N=2

N=5 N=3

N=2 N=4

N=2 N=5

N =1

N =3 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=5 N=4

N=3 N=5

N=1

N=4 N=2

N=4 N=3

N=4 N=4

N=5 N=5

N=1

N=2 N=2

activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the
1 EP
actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)

inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
2 Intercom
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

MOD =

NOTES

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

1 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

BT00642-a -EN

EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of

2 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+2)

EP door lock release (configured with P+3), directly, without call, or activation of

3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+3 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+3)

EP door lock release (configured with P+4), directly, without call, or activation of

4 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+4 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+4)

298 2 WIRE VDE system

N=1

N=2

N=3

N=4

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344192
MODE

KEY

MOD =

FUNCTION

NOTES

1 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 1)

2 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 2)

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
4
7

MOD =

N=3 N=2

N=1 N=3

N=1

N=2 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=1

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,

1 or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=2

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,

2 or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

MOD =

3 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 1)

4 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 2)

1 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 1)

2 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 2)

3 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 3)

4 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 4)

1 General Intercom, sends a call to all the handsets of the system.
EP activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the

2 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
4
MOD =

12
1 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

2 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

BT00642-a-EN

N=2

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
4

2 WIRE VDE system 299

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344192
MODE
MOD =

KEY

FUNCTION

NOTES
N=1

13
1 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

N=2

2 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

N=3

3 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

N=4

4 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

MOD =

1 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 1)

2 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 2)

3 General Intercom, sends a call to all the handsets of the system.
EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

4 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

BT00642-a -EN

300 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344192
Configuration
Further SPECIAL functions (e.g. professional studio, pager, handsfree) can be enabled by
configuring MOD in the following modes:

20 = B
40 = C
60 = D
80 = E

BT00642-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 301

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344192
OFFICE FUNCTION DETAIL
With the function active, when a call is received from
the entrance panel, the video handset rings and the
associated door lock is automatically released, without
the need for pressing the door lock release key on the
video handset.

CLAK

To ENABLE the function

Led ON
Led ON

BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP

>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
Led ON
Led ON
Led ON
Led ON

To DISABLE the function

BT00642-a -EN

>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
It cannot be enabled together with the “DOOR Status” function.

302 2 WIRE VDE system

BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP

EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344192
DOOR Status function
This function notifies the status of the door lock. If open, the “door lock LED” flashes, if
closed, the LED stays off.
NOTA: è attivabile solo se l’impianto lo prevede; NON è attivabile contemporaneamente
alla OFFICE function.
PAGING function
This function can be used to send voice messages using the microphone of the device
through the speakers of the sound system. To activate briefly press the ”Connection” key
while the device is in the idle condition. The activation of the function is confirmed by
the green LED coming on. To DISABLE the function press the ”Connection” key again.

BEEP
BEEP

EXIT
EXIT

BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP

EXIT
EXIT

>3s
>3s
To DISABLE the function

>3s
>3s
Enable/disable key sound
In the base configuration when a key is pressed, a beep is emitted. This function may be
disabled/enabled with the following procedure:
BEEP

BEEP
BEEP
BEEP

To ENABLE the function

BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP

To DISABLE the function

BT00642-a -EN

>3s
>3s

>3s
>3s
2 WIRE VDE system 303

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344192
Programming of bells
Bell selection from MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL (S=0)

BT00642-a -EN

>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
Bell selection from SECONDARY ENTRANCE
>3s PANEL (S=1)
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
INTERCOM CALL bell selection
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
EXTERNAL INTERCOM CALL bell selection
>3s
(only with interface item 346850) >3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
FLOOR CALL bell selection
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s
>3s

304 2 WIRE VDE system

1
1
1111
11
1111
11
1
111
11111
1
111211
11211
112122
1
1221
1112212
112222
1
21222
2122
2
222322
22322
22323
233
232
222333
2233
23
32333
32333
3
3333433
3343
4
3344
34
3443
33344
3344
34
4344
4344
4444
444
444
4
44
444
4
444
44
4
4
4

1
1
1121
21
22112
12
16
1
16
12221
16
17
121
16
17
1212
17
1
17
2112
17
22111
17
212
17
17
221
17
17
212
17
17
2
17
1
17
17
122
17
16
17
121
17
16
1
21112
16
16
17
2112
17
22121
21
17
17
17
2221
17
21
17
17
2
17
1712
17
121
17
17
17
1
2
17
12
1
2112
17
16
17
211
16
22112
16
21
17
16
22112
17
2
17
21
17
17
1721
17
1221
17
17
17
12
17
12
21112
17
17
17
211
17
22112
17
21
16
17
22211
16
2211
17
16
2
17
17212
16
17
1221
17
17
1
17
17
1212
17
17
1
17
21
17
221
17
2
17
17
2
17
2
16
17
16
17
16
16

OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Colour video handsfree

344502

Description

Front view

2 WIRE colour video handsfree internal unit for wall mounted installation.
It has a 3.5” colour LCD display. Keys available: auto-switching on / cycling, door lock
release, staircase lights control, and handsfree connection.
Depending on the configurator connected to (M), the same keys will perform different
functions (see the specific configuration section).
LED used for: call exclusion, door status, connection with the entrance panel. Adjustments
for: display colour, display brightness, speaker volume, and call tone volume/exclusion
(16 different ringtones available).
For the installation to the wall, the bracket supplied must be used.

2
3

4
5
6
7
8
9
13

Rear view

12 11 10

15 16 17

Technical data

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
10 mA
200 mA
5 – 40 °C

19
18

Dimensional data

Legend

1. Microphone
A

2. Red LED for call exclusion notification
3. Bell volume adjustment/call exclusion
4. Incoming audio volume adjustment
5. Display brightness adjustment
6. Display colour adjustment

7. Door lock activation and/or door status red LED
8. Door lock key
9. Operating status two-colour red/green LED
10. Communication enabling/disabling key
BT00717-a-EN

11. Entrance panel/cycling key
12. Staircase light switching on key
13. Loudspeaker
14. 3.5” LCD display
15. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
A

140 mm

C
27 mm

16. MASTER/SLAVE J1 configurator socket (remove for SLAVE)
17. Configurator socket
18. Clamps for the connection of an external call to the floor pushbutton
19. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps

2 WIRE VDE system 305

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344502
Configuration

The device must be only physically configured.
N - handset number
The configurators connected to the N sockets of the device assign an identification
number within the system to each video handset. The handsets must be configured
in progressive order. Handsets with parallel connection (max 3 are allowed inside the
apartment without item 346850) must be configured with the same N configurator.
Additional audio handsets, video handsets and/or bells can be installed in parallel to
the basic video handset.

J
1

P – entrance panel association
The configurators connected to the P sockets of the device identify the associated
EP, which is the first entrance panel that switches itself on when the pushbutton
is pressed the first time, as well as which door lock is activated when pressing the
pushbutton while the video handset is idle.
M – operating mode
The configurator connected to the M socket of the device assigns the operating
modes to the 4 programmable keys based on the following indications.
J1 – MASTER/SLAVE function
The JMP configurator connected to the J1 socket of the device enables or disables the
MASTER/SLAVE function: JMP connected = MASTER; JMP removed = SLAVE.
Below are the various operating modes that can be assigned to the 4 programmable
keys:
MODE
M = 0 (with key tone active)

KEY

FUNCTION
Activation of the EP (configured with the same P) directly without call.
Cycling of EP and cameras installed in the system. Direct call to the switchboard, if present in the system.

Audio enabling / disabling following a call.

Direct EP door lock activation (EP configured with the same P), or activation of the EP door lock upon connection.

Staircase light switching on.

M = 1 (with key tone active)

Activation of the EP (configured with the same P) directly without call.
Cycling of EP and cameras installed in the system. Direct call to the switchboard, if present in the system.

BT00717-a -EN

Audio enabling / disabling following a call.

Direct EP door lock activation (EP configured with the same P), or activation of the EP door lock upon connection.

EP door lock activation (EP configured with P+1), directly without call, or activation of an actuator 346200 (configured with P+1
and MOD=5), or activation of a door lock actuator 346230 - 346260 (configured with P+1).

306 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344502
Configuration
MODE
M = 2 (with key tone active)

KEY

FUNCTION
Internal intercom. It sends the call to all the handsets with the same address.

Audio enabling / disabling following a call.

Direct EP door lock activation (EP configured with the same P), or activation of the EP door lock upon connection.

Staircase light switching on.

M = 3 (with key tone active)

Activation of the EP (configured with the same P) directly without call.
Cycling of EP and cameras installed in the system. Direct call to the switchboard, if present in the system.
Audio enabling / disabling following a call.

Direct EP door lock activation (EP configured with the same P), or activation of the EP door lock upon connection.

Internal intercom. It sends the call to all the handsets with the same address.

M = 4 (with key tone active)

“PRESET INTERCOM” function with intercommunicating call to the Handset configured with N=1.
From the system handsets it is possible to send an intercom call to the handset configured with N=1.
The entrance panel configured with N=1 can intercom calls, but is UNABLE to send them.
Audio enabling / disabling following a call.

Direct EP door lock activation (EP configured with the same P), or activation of the EP door lock upon connection.

Staircase light switching on.
As M=0 but with key tone disabled

M=6

As M=10 but with key tone disabled

M=7

As M=2 but with key tone disabled

M=8

As M=3 but with key tone disabled

M=9

As M=4 but with key tone disabled

BT00717-a -EN

M=5

PUSH TO TALK function
If the entrance panel is in a particularly noisy position, during the conversation it will be possible to enable the “PUSH TO TALK” function, which will provide a better quality of communication.
To use the PUSH TO TALK function, during a conversation proceed as indicated below.
During a conversation press the conversation key for >2 minutes: the LED switches ON green, and communication from the video handset to the entrance panel is established; when the communication
key is released, the LED turns red and communication from the entrance panel to the video handset is established. To terminate the conversation press and release the conversation key.
TIME-OUT and conversation times are respectively: 30” after the call, 1’ after the start of the conversation.

2 WIRE VDE system 307

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344502
Programming of bells

LED notifications

The video handset offers the possibility to select among 16 types of bells with
programmed ringtones, which can be freely associated to the following type of calls:
- Calls from the entrance panel (configured with S = 0);
- INTERCOM call;
- Floor call.
Selection of the call bells from the main EP (S = 0).

Door lock status and/or door status red LED notifications:
LED ON steady = door lock pushbutton pressed;
LED ON flashing = door open;
LED OFF= door closed.

NOTE: The door status function notifies the status of the door lock. If open the “LED door lock”
flashes, and if closed, the LED stays off.
This function is only available in preset systems.

Operating status two-colour (red/green) LED notifications:
LED ON steady (green) = conversation active;
LED ON flashing (green) = call active or intercom call forwarded;

> 3s

RED
LED
ON

RED
LED
OFF

Preset intercom / intercom call bell selection.

> 3s

RED
LED
ON

RED
LED
OFF

Floor call bell selection.

BT00717-a -EN

> 3s

RED
LED
ON

RED
LED
OFF

308 2 WIRE VDE system

LED ON flashing (red) = programming procedure being performed.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Video handsfree
with inductive loop

344512

Description

Front view

2 WIRE colour video handsfree internal unit with inductive loop for wall mounted
installation.
It has a 3.5” colour LCD display. Keys available: auto-switching on / cycling, door lock
release, staircase lights control, and handsfree connection.
Depending on the configurator connected to (M), the same keys will perform different
functions (see the specific configuration section).
LED used for: call exclusion, door status, connection with the entrance panel. Adjustments
for: display colour, display brightness, speaker volume, and call tone volume/exclusion
(16 different ringtones available).
The inductive loop function enables the device to be used by people wearing hearing
aids with (T) selector.
For the installation to the wall, the bracket supplied must be used.

2
3

4
5
6
7
8
9
13

Rear view

12 11 10

15 16 17

Technical data

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
10 mA
200 mA
5 – 40 °C

19
18

Dimensional data

Legend

1. Microphone
A

2. Red LED for call exclusion notification
3. Bell volume adjustment/call exclusion
4. Incoming audio volume adjustment
5. Display brightness adjustment
6. Display colour adjustment

7. Door lock activation and/or door status red LED
8. Door lock key
9. Operating status two-colour red/green LED
10. Communication enabling/disabling key
BT00716-a -EN

11. Entrance panel/cycling key
12. Staircase light switching on key
13. Loudspeaker
14. 3.5” LCD display
15. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
A

140 mm

C
27 mm

16. MASTER/SLAVE J1 configurator socket (remove for SLAVE)
17. Configurator socket
18. Clamps for the connection of an external call to the floor pushbutton
19. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps

2 WIRE VDE system 309

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344512
Configuration

J
1

KEY

FUNCTION
Activation of the EP (configured with the same P) directly without call.
Cycling of EP and cameras installed in the system. Direct call to the switchboard, if present in the system.

Audio enabling / disabling following a call.

Direct EP door lock activation (EP configured with the same P), or activation of the EP door lock upon connection.

Staircase light switching on.

M = 1 (with key tone active)

BT00716-a -EN

Activation of the EP (configured with the same P) directly without call.
Cycling of EP and cameras installed in the system. Direct call to the switchboard, if present in the system.

Audio enabling / disabling following a call.

Direct EP door lock activation (EP configured with the same P), or activation of the EP door lock upon connection.

310 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344512
Configuration
MODE
M = 2 (with key tone active)

KEY

FUNCTION
Internal intercom. It sends the call to all the handsets with the same address.

Audio enabling / disabling following a call.

Direct EP door lock activation (EP configured with the same P), or activation of the EP door lock upon connection.

Staircase light switching on.

M = 3 (with key tone active)

Direct EP door lock activation (EP configured with the same P), or activation of the EP door lock upon connection.

Internal intercom. It sends the call to all the handsets with the same address.

M = 4 (with key tone active)

Direct EP door lock activation (EP configured with the same P), or activation of the EP door lock upon connection.

Staircase light switching on.
As M=0 but with key tone disabled.

M=6

As M= 1 but with key tone disabled.

M=7

As M= 2 but with key tone disabled.

M=8

As M= 3 but with key tone disabled.

M=9

As M= 4 but with key tone disabled.

BT00716-a -EN

M=5

PUSH TO TALK function
If the entrance panel is in a particularly noisy position, during the conversation it will be possible to enable the “PUSH TO TALK” function, which will provide a better quality of communication.
To use the PUSH TO TALK function, during a conversation proceed as indicated below.
During a conversation press the conversation key for >2 minutes: the LED switches ON green, and communication from the video handset to the entrance panel is established; when the communication
key is released, the LED turns red and communication from the entrance panel to the video handset is established. To terminate the conversation press and release the conversation key.
TIME-OUT and conversation times are respectively: 30” after the call, 1’ after the start of the conversation.

2 WIRE VDE system 311

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344512
Programming of bells

LED notifications

Door lock status and/or door status red LED notifications:

Selection of the call bells from the main EP (S = 0).

NOTE: The door status function notifies the status of the door lock. If open the “LED door lock”
flashes, and if closed, the LED stays off.
This function is only available in preset systems.

LED ON steady = door lock pushbutton pressed;
LED ON flashing = door open;
LED OFF= door closed.

Operating status two-colour (red/green) LED notifications:

LED ON steady (green) = conversation active;
LED ON flashing (green) = call active or intercom call forwarded;
2

> 3s

RED
LED
ON

LED ON flashing (red) = programming procedure being performed.
RED
LED
OFF

INDUCTIVE LOOP use

The inductive loop function enables the device to be used by people wearing hearing
aids with (T) selector.
Switch the selector of the acoustic device to the T position and to ensure correct magnetic
coupling between the device and the acoustic device, we recommend a position in front
of the device, at a distance of 25-35 cm.

Preset intercom / intercom call bell selection.

NOTE: the presence of metal and background noise generated by electric/electronic
devices (e.g. computer) may compromise the performance and the quality of the
coupling device.

> 3s

RED
LED
ON

RED
LED
OFF

Floor call bell selection.
2535 c
m

BT00716-a -EN

> 3s

RED
LED
ON

RED
LED
OFF

312 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SWING
audio handset

344704

Description
2 WIRE audio handset for wall mounted installation. It’s fitted with keys for: door lock
release, and 4 programmable keys (0-1-2-3), which operating mode is set through the
configuration. The volume of the bell can be adjusted, or the bell may be disabled. It has
16 different pre-programmed bells.
It also performs the following functions: conversation secrecy, office (when the call is
made from the entrance panel the associated door lock automatically opens without the
need for pressing the relevant key on the handset), door lock status check.
When a SWING handset is used toghether with an “Elettrika” CISA door lock (with
accessory 346240), it is possible to control the status of the door lock connected to the
system using door lock actuators, item 346230/item 346260.
If the “Elettrika” CISA door lock is open, the SWING Handset LED flashes. The LED will
continue flashing while the lock remains open.
Wall fixing bracket supplied.
Technical data

2
3
4

Front view
18 – 27 Vdc
5 mA
35 mA
5 - 40°C

Dimensional data

90 mm

56 mm

%86

2)) 21

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

7
8

3
2
1

0
2
'

215 mm

1 3

Internal view

1 - 4 programmable keys using the configuration (0-1-2-3)
2 - Door lock key
3 - DOOR Status signalling LED or activation of the OFFICE function
4 - Extensible cord capped on both ends with RJ connectors
5 - Bell volume adjustment and exclusion
6 - Clamps for the connection of the 2 WIRE BUS, additional floor call functions and extra bell.
7 - Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch (audio/video systems only)
8 - Configurator socket

BT00643-a -EN

Legend

2 WIRE VDE system 313

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344704

P – entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the associated EP, or the first entrance panel on which the
audio is activated when the (0) is pressed for the first time, as well as which door lock is
activated when the key
is pressed while the handset is idle.
Configurator in P
0-9

Key function (0)
Entrance panel audio activation
(configured with P = 0-9)

Configurator in P
0-9

Key function
Opening of the EP door lock
(configured with P = 0-9)

MOD = Operating mode of the keys
In addition to the door lock opening key, the SWING handset also has 4 programmable
keys (0-1-2-3). The programmable keys may be associated to different operating modes
(e.g. activation of external actuators, intercom, additional EP activation, “office” mode
activation), depending on the type of configurators connected to MOD (see details in
the following pages).

BT00643-a -EN

314 2 WIRE VDE system

5 1 ET

BUS

OFF

N – handset number
The N configurator assigns to each handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order. In case of handsets with
parallel connection (max 3) inside the apartment without item 346850, these must be
configured using the same N configurator.

Configuration

N
N P

M
O
D

MOD

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344704
Configuration
Below are the various operating modes that can be assigned to the 4 programmable keys:
MODE

KEY

FUNCTION

NOTES

3 Staircase light switching on

MOD =

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

2 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P+1), directly, without

1 call, or activation of the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P), directly, without call, and

0 cycling
MOD =

3 Staircase light switching on
N=1

N=2 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=1

N=3 N=2

N=1 N=3

N=1

N=2 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=2

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,

2 or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=1

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,

1 or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P), directly, without call, and

0 cycling
MOD =

3 Staircase light switching on
N=2

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,

2 or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P+1), directly, without

1 call, or activation of the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P), directly, without call, and

0 cycling
MOD =

3 Staircase light switching on

actuator item 346230/item 346260 (configured with P+2)

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

BT00643-a-EN

EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of

2 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5) or activation of the
1 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5) or activation of the
actuator item 346230/item 346260 (configured with P+1)

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P), directly, without call, and

0 cycling

2 WIRE VDE system 315

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344704
MODE
MOD =

KEY

FUNCTION

NOTES

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P+3), directly, without

3 call, or activation of the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+3 and MOD=9)

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P+2), directly, without

2 call, or activation of the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=9)

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P+1), directly, without

1 call, or activation of the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P), directly, without call, and

0 cycling
MOD =

N =1

N =3 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=5 N=4

N=3 N=5

N=1

N=2 N=2

N=5 N=3

N=2 N=4

N=2 N=5

N=1

N=5 N=2

N=1 N=3

N=1 N=4

N=1 N=5

N=1

N=4 N=2

N=4 N=3

N=4 N=4

N=5 N=5

N=1

N=2 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=1

N=3 N=2

N=1 N=3

N=3

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

3 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=2

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

2 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=1

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

1 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

0 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.
MOD =

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the

3 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5) or activation of the actuator item
346230/item 346260 (configured with P+1)

N=2

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

2 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.
BT00643-a -EN

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

1 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.
0 EP activation (configured with P), directly, without call

316 2 WIRE VDE system

N=1

N=4

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344704

MODE
MOD =

KEY

FUNCTION

NOTES

EP door lock release (configured with P+4), directly, without call, or activation of the

3 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+4 and MOD=5) or activation of the actuator item
346230/item 346260 (configured with P+4)

EP door lock release (configured with P+3), directly, without call, or activation of the

2 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+3 and MOD=5) or activation of the actuator item
346230/item 346260 (configured with P+3)

EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of the

1 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5) or activation of the actuator item
346230/item 346260 (configured with P+2)

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the

0 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5) or activation of the actuator item
346230/item 346260 (configured with P+1)

MOD =

3 Staircase light switching on
N=2

2 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

N=1

1 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

0 EP activation (configured with P), directly, without call
MOD =

3 Staircase light switching on
N=2 N=2

N=3 N=3

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

2 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=2

BT00643-a-EN

N=1

EP activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the

1 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)
0 EP activation (configured with P), directly, without call

2 WIRE VDE system 317

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344704
MODE
MOD =

KEY

FUNCTION

NOTES
N=3

12
3 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

N=2

2 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

N=1

1 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

N=4

0 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

MOD =

3 Staircase light switching on
2 Activation of the scenario 2 saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 2)

1 Activation of the scenario 1 saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 1)

0 EP activation (configured with P), directly, without call
MOD =

BT00643-a -EN

MOD =

3 Activation of the scenario 3 saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 3)

2 Activation of the scenario 2 saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 2)

1 Activation of the scenario 1 saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 1)

0 Activation of the scenario 4 saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 4)

3 Activation of the paging function on all the sound system loudspeakers
2 EP door lock release configured with P, directly, without call
1 Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call
Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P), directly, without call,

0 and cycling

318 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344704
OFFICE function
With the function active, when a call is received from the
entrance panel, the handset rings and the associated door lock
is automatically released, without the need for pressing the door
lock release key on the handset.
3
2
1

3
2
1

BIP3

1
10s
Led OFF

To ENABLE the function

Led OFF

To DISABLE the function

BIP

Led OFF

10s
Led OFF

CLAK

10s
Led OFF

MOD Configuration

BIP
To activate the OFFICE function refer to the following:
Led OFF

10s

00
01
02
03
05
06
10
11
12
13
15
16
40

20
21
22
23
25
26
30
31
32
33
35
36
60

MOD

+20

A Configuration selected for the operation of the keys (see previous pages)
B Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + OFFICE function

BT00643-a -EN

MOD

2 WIRE VDE system 319

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344704
Programming of bells
Bell selection from MAIN ENTRANCE
PANEL (S=0)

Bell selection from SECONDARY
ENTRANCE PANEL (S=1)

3
2
1

FLOOR CALL bell selection

3
2
1

1 1
1 2

1 2

1 16

1 16
4

RESET

BT00643-a -EN

320 2 WIRE VDE system

1 1

1 2

1 16

1 16
4

RESET

3
2
1

2
3

RESET

3
2
1

O
3

1 1

3
2
1

INTERCOM CALL bell selection

RESET

3
2
1

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SWING
Colour video handsets

344824

Description

Front view

SWING 2 wire TFT colour video handset for wall mount installation. It has the following
pushbuttons: door lock release, and 4 programmable keys (0-1-2-3), which operating
mode is set through the configuration.
The volume of the bell can be adjusted, or the bell may be disabled. It has 16 different
pre-programmed bells. It also performs the following functions: conversation secrecy,
master/slave, office (when the call is made from the entrance panel the associated
door lock automatically opens without the need for pressing the relevant key on the
handset), door lock status check.
When a SWING handset is used together with an “Elettrika” CISA door lock (with
accessory 346240), it is possible to control the status of the door lock connected to the
system using door lock actuators, item 346230 art.346260.
If the “Elettrika” CISA door lock is open, the SWING Handset LED flashes. The LED will
continue flashing while the lock remains open.
Wall fixing bracket supplied.

3
32
21

O
1

7
Technical data

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Horizontal resolution:
Vertical resolution:
Operating temperature:

Rear view

18 – 27 Vdc
5 mA
290 mA
250 TV lines
300 TV lines
5 – 40 °C

10
Dimensional data

210 mm

56 mm

MOD

11
12

JMP 1

P MOD

JMP 1
P MOD JMP
2

ON 2
JMP
OFF
ON

15
12
12

3
2
1
0

215 mm

BUS BUS

OFF

Legend

BT00644-a -EN

1. Monitor colour adjustment
2. Brightness adjustment monitor
3. 4” colour LCD monitor
4. 4 programmable keys (0-1-2-3) using the configuration
5. Door lock key
6. Bell volume adjustment and exclusion
7. Extensible cord capped on both ends with RJ connectors
8. Door status signalling LED or activation of the office function
9. Configurator socket
10. Master/Slave jumper (JMP1) (Remove for Slave)
11. Jumper (JMP2) to be removed when an additional power supply is used
12. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
13. Clamps for the connection of the 2 WIRE BUS, additional power supply, and
auxiliary floor call function, as well as extra bell.

2 WIRE VDE system 321

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344824
Configuration

N – handset number
The N configurator assigns each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order. In case of handsets with
parallel connection (max max.3) inside the apartment without item 346850, these must
be configured using the same N configurator.
P – entrance panel switching on
The P configurator identifies the associated EP, or the first entrance panel to switch
on automatically when the (0) key is pressed for the first time, and which door lock to
activate by pressing the
key while the video handset is idle.

P MOD

MOD

JMP 1

JMP 2

Key function
Opening of the EP door lock
(configured with P = 0-9)

Configurator in P
0-9

ON
OFF

Key function (0)
Entrance panel audio activation
(configured with P = 0-9)

BUS

Configurator in P
0-9

MOD = Operating mode of the keys
In addition to the door lock opening key, the SWING video handset also has 4
programmable keys (0-1-2-3). The programmable keys may be associated to different
operating modes (e.g. activation of external actuators, intercom, additional EP activation,
“OFFICE” mode activation), depending on the type of configurators connected to MOD.

BT00644-a -EN

322 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344824

Below are the various operating modes that can be assigned to the 4 programmable keys:
MODE

KEY

FUNCTION

NOTES

3 Staircase light switching on

MOD =

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

2 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P+1), directly, without

1 call, or activation of the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)

0 Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P), directly, without call, and cycling
MOD =

3 Staircase light switching on
N=1

N=2 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=1

N=3 N=2

N=1 N=3

N=2

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,

2 or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=1

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,

1 or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

0 Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P), directly, without call, and cycling
MOD =

3 Staircase light switching on
N=2

2 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

1 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

BT00644-a-EN

N=1

0 EP activation (configured with P), directly, without call

2 WIRE VDE system 323

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344824
MODE

KEY

MOD =

FUNCTION

NOTES

3 Staircase light switching on
N=1

N=2 N=2

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

2 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P+1), directly, without

1 call, or activation of the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)

0 Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P), directly, without call, and cycling
5

MOD =

3 Staircase light switching on
EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of

2 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5) or activation of the
actuator item 346230/item 346260 (configured with P+2)

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of

1 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5) or activation of the
actuator item 346230/item 346260 (configured with P+1)

0 Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P), directly, without call, and cycling

MOD =

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P+3), directly, without

3 call, or activation of the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+3 and MOD=9)

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P+2), directly, without

2 call, or activation of the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=9)
BT00644-a -EN

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P+1), directly, without

1 call, or activation of the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)

0 Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P), directly, without call, and cycling

324 2 WIRE VDE system

N=1

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344824
MODE
MOD =

KEY

FUNCTION

NOTES
N =1

N =3 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=5 N=4

N=3 N=5

N=1

N=2 N=2

N=5 N=3

N=2 N=4

N=2 N=5

N=1

N=5 N=2

N=1 N=3

N=1 N=4

N=1 N=5

N=1

N=4 N=2

N=4 N=3

N=4 N=4

N=5 N=5

N=1

N=2 N=2

N=3 N=3

N=1

N=3 N=2

N=1 N=3

N=3

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

3 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=2

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

2 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=1

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

1 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=4

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

0 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

MOD =

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the

3 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5) or activation of the actuator item
346230/item 346260 (configured with P+1)

N=2

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

2 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.

N=1

Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850, or

1 intercom among apartments without apartment interface.
0 EP activation (configured with P), directly, without call
MOD =

EP door lock release (configured with P+4), directly, without call, or activation of the

3 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+4 and MOD=5) or activation of the actuator item
346230/item 346260 (configured with P+4)

346230/item 346260 (configured with P+3)

EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of the

BT00644-a-EN

EP door lock release (configured with P+3), directly, without call, or activation of the

2 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+3 and MOD=5) or activation of the actuator item

1 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5) or activation of the actuator item
346230/item 346260 (configured with P+2)

EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the

0 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5) or activation of the actuator item
346230/item 346260 (configured with P+1)

2 WIRE VDE system 325

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344824
MODE
MOD =

KEY

FUNCTION

NOTE
N=3

12
3 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

N=2

2 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

N=1

1 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

N=4

0 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850

MOD =

3 Staircase light switching on
2 Activation of the scenario 2 saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 2)

1 Activation of the scenario 1 saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 1)

0 EP activation (configured with P), directly, without call
MOD =

BT00644-a -EN

MOD =

3 Activation of the scenario 3 saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 3)

2 Activation of the scenario 2 saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 2)

1 Activation of the scenario 1 saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 1)

0 Activation of the scenario 4 saved in the scenario module

(SCENARIO 4)

3 Activation of the paging function on all the sound system loudspeakers
2 EP door lock release configured with P, directly, without call
Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P+1), directly, without

1 call

Audio/video EP or camera activation (configured with P), directly, without call,

0 and cycling
326 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344824
OFFICE function

With the function active, when a call is received from the
entrance panel, the video handset rings and the associated door
lock is automatically released, without the need for pressing the
door lock release key on the video handset.
3
2
1
O

3
2
1
O

BIP3

1
10s
Led OFF

To ENABLE the function

Led OFF

To DISABLE the function

BIP

Led OFF

10s
Led OFF

CLAK

10s
Led OFF

MOD configuration

BIP
To activate the office function refer to the following:
Led OFF

10s

00
01
02
03
05
06
10
11
12
13
15
16
40

20
21
22
23
25
26
30
31
32
33
35
36
60

MOD

+20

A Configuration selected for the operation of the keys (see previous pages)
B Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + OFFICE function

BT00644-a -EN

MOD

2 WIRE VDE system 327

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344824
Programming of bells

Bell selection from MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL (S=0)

1 1
1

1 2

OK
4

RESET

3
2
1

1 16
Bell selection from SECONDARY ENTRANCE PANEL (S=1)

1 1
1

1 2

OK
4

RESET

3
2
1

1 16
INTERCOM CALL bell selection

1 1
1

1 2

OK
4

RESET

3
2
1

1 16
FLOOR CALL bell selection

1 1
1

BT00644-a -EN

328 2 WIRE VDE system

1 2

OK
4

RESET

1 16

3
2
1

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SWING
Black and white basic video handset

344832

Description

Wall video handset with black and white 4” monitor for use in 2 WIRE systems.
With the following pushbuttons for video door entry system functions: door lock release,
entrance panel/ camera scrolling activation, staircase lights switching on and intercom.
The volume of the bell can be adjusted, or the bell may be disabled.
With 16 different types of already preset bells, selectable for the call to the floor, main
entrance panel bell, and intercom functions.
It also has a secret conversation function, and “door status” control (function possible in
conjunction with the door lock actuators 346230 - 346260 and with CISA ELETTRIKA door
lock with 346240 accessory).
Wall mounting bracket supplied as standard.

1
2
3
4

Correlated items

346020 (additional 2 DIN modules power supply) - optional, for local powering of the
video handset, when maximum installation distances are necessary
346230 2 DIN door lock actuator
346260 4 DIN timed door lock actuator
346240 CISA ELETTRIKA door lock accessory

Technical data

Power supply from SCS BUS :
Stand-by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

20.5 – 27 Vdc
5 mA
400 mA @ 27 V - 650 mA @ 20.5 V
5 - 40°C

8
9

MOD

10
11

JMP 1

P MOD

JMP 2

Dimensional data

ON
OFF

Art. 344832

BUS

215 mm

3
2
1
0

56 mm

210 mm

Legend

1. Intercom call pushbutton
2. Staircase lights pushbutton
3. Entrance panel/camera scrolling activation pushbutton
4. Door lock release pushbutton + door status LED
6. Monitor brightness adjustment
7. Monitor contrast adjustment
8. Configurator socket
9. MASTER/SLAVE jumper (Remove to enable SLAVE)

BT00645-a -EN

5. Bell adjustment and exclusion

10. Additional power supply jumper. (Remove if a local power supply is connected to
clamps 1 - 2)
11. Line termination ON/OFF microswitch
12. Connection clamp for: 2 WIRE BUS, call to the floor, additional power supply and
additional bell.

2 WIRE VDE system 329

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344832
Configuration

Installation

MOD

The video handset

in terms of:

160 – 165 cm

N - handset number
The N configurator assigns to each video handset an identification number within the 2
wire system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order.
Handsets with parallel connection (max 3 are allowed inside apartments without
346850 interface) must be configured using the same N configurator.
P - entrance panel number
The P configurator identifies the entrance panel associated, or the first entrance panel to
activate before pressing the key and which door lock is activated when the key
is pressed while the video handset is idle.
Configuration in P

Key function

P= 0-96

Activation of the audio function on the
entrance panel (configured with P= 0-96)

Configuration in P

Key function

P= 0-96

Opening of the EP door lock
(configured with P= 0-96)

Height recommended, unless otherwise required by the law

M - intercom operating mode
The intercom function enables audio communication (maximum 3 minutes) between
handsets within the same apartment.
Two configuration modes are possible:
M = 00 (no configurator connected). Multi-family Intercom between devices (max. 3)
configured with the same N configurator.
M =10 general intercom to be used in single family systems, or in systems installed
below the apartment interface 346850.

BT00645-a -EN

330 2 WIRE VDE system

Ø 5 mm

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344832
General rules for installation

Handset
346850

The connection of the devices is non polarised, and may be completed by wiring the
system in two different ways:
- In-out wiring directly on the device clamps (handsets)
- star wiring, with floor shunt (item 346841) installed directly inside the round box
(recommended).

346581

OUT

The furthest
video handset

OUT

OFF

MOD=0
and
MOD=5

The use of conductors with characteristics other than the prescribed ones does not guarantee good performance and good quality of the video signal. Therefore, only the cables
described in the following tables should be used.
When using the distance tables, interfaces 346850 and 346851 must be treated as handsets within LINE C, and as a two buttons entrance panels within line B.

IN
ON

LINE C - systems with only 1 entrance panel:
Sfera (342170 + 342510 + 342240)
Sfera (342170 + 342550 + 342240)
Linea 2000

LINE C

F441

346000 346830

LINE A

346000

BUS
TK

BUS
PI

SC S

LINE B

Entrance panel
346850

346581

OUT

IN
ON

OFF

OUT

IN
ON

OFF

MOD=0
and
MOD=5

BT00645-a -EN

LINE D

* Max variable distance

Door lock

Note: For those systems where only apartment interfaces are installed (in/out
connection), the distance of the C line to take into account is 200 m (with BTicino
cable 336904)

2 WIRE VDE system 331

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344832
Max. distances and features of cables in MULTI-FAMILY VIDEO SYSTEMS

The HANDSETS classed as (BASE) are: BASE SWING video handset;
The HANDSETS classed as (TRADITIONAL) are: PIVOT, SWING, SPRINT, POLYX VIDEO;
The HANDSETS classed as (ADVANCED) are: POLYX VIDEO DISPLAY, AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY, AXOLUTE VIDEO STATION, AXOLUTE N&W VIDEO STATION, POLYX MEMORY STATION.
System created using traditional handsets and at least one base
swing handset - black and white entrance panel
Maximum LINE A distance, Entrance panel - furthest Handset

Maximum LINE B distance, Entrance panel - Power supply

Cable section mm

Cable section mm2

2 pushbuttons

200

115

5 HA/5 pushbuttons
10 HA/10 pushbuttons
26 HA/26 pushbuttons
40 HA/entrance panel with local power
supply
40 HA/digital call modules

50
50
50
50

200
200
200
200

135
135
135
135

120
115
105
-

10 pushbuttons

170

100

26 pushbuttons

150

Digital call

150

Entrance panel with local power supply

200

140

120

200

135

100

10 In/out HA

100

18 In/out HA

100

22 In/out HA

26 In/out HA

5 HA (shunted)

100

10 HA (shunted)

18 HA (shunted)

22 HA (shunted)

26 HA (shunted)

30 HA (shunted) (2)

40 HA (shunted) (2)

332 2 WIRE VDE system

S+S– clamps

30 m

1 mm2

100

BTicino 336904 cable

5 In/out HA

BTicino L4669 cable

2 normal cables
>0.2 mm2

BT00645-a -EN

2 In/out HA

0.28 mm2

Cable section mm2

A pair of the multi-pair
data cable C9881U/5E

Cable section mm

Telephone twisted
pair - 0.28 mm2

Maximum LINE D distance Entrance panel - Door lock

BTicino 3 36904 cable

Maximum LINE C distance, Power supply - furthest Handset (1)

A pair of the multi-pair
data cable C9881U/5E

135

Telephone twisted
pair - 0.28 mm2

135

BTicino 336904 cable

200

2 normal cables
>0.2 mm2 or L4669

A pair of the multi-pair
data cable C9881U/5E

BTicino 336904 cable

2 HA/2 pushbuttons

2 normal cables
>0.2 mm2

Telephone twisted
pair - 0.28 mm

30 m

50 m

100 m

Note (1): LINE C valid for SFERA (342170 + 342510 + 342240), SFERA (342170 +
342550 + 342240), SFERA A/V (342560 + 342240) or LINEA 2000 entrance
panels.
Note (2): if necessary, power the entrance panel locally.
WARNING: in order to reach longer distances, instead of the video adapter item.
346830, the audio/video node, item F441 (generating up to 4 risers), may be used. In
this mode one of the previous conditions, with less Handsets and a longer distance on
the C LINE, is recreated.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344832

Telephone twisted
pair - 0.28 mm2

BTicino 336904 cable

2 normal cables
>0.2 mm2

A pair of the multi-pair
data cable C9881U/5E

Cable section mm2

BTicino 336904 cable

Cable section mm

2 normal cables
>0.2 mm2 or L4669

Maximum LINE B distance, Entrance panel - Power supply

A pair of the multi-pair
data cable C9881U/5E

Maximum LINE A distance, Entrance panel - furthest Handset

Telephone twisted
pair - 0.28 mm2

System created using advanced or traditional handsets and at least
one base SWING handset – colour entrance panel

2 HA/2 pushbuttons

200

140

135

2 pushbuttons

200

115

5 HA/5 pushbuttons

200

140

120

10 pushbuttons

170

100

10 HA/10 pushbuttons

200

140

115

26 pushbuttons

150

24 HA/24 pushbuttons

200

140

100

Digital call

150

30 HA/entrance panel with local power
supply

200

140

Entrance panel with local power supply

200

140

120

100

10 In/out HA

18 In/out HA

24 In/out HA

5 HA (shunted)

100

10 HA (shunted)

18 HA (shunted)

24 HA (shunted)

30 HA (shunted) (2)

S+S– clamps

30 m

1 mm2

Telephone twisted
pair - 0.28 mm2

BTicino 336904 cable

2 normal cables
>0.2 mm2

5 In/out HA

30 m

50 m

100 m

Note (1): LINE C valid for SFERA (342170 + 342510 + 342240), SFERA (342170 +
342550 + 342240), SFERA A/V (342560 + 342240) or LINEA 2000 entrance
panels.
Note (2): if necessary, power the entrance panel locally.
WARNING: in order to reach longer distances, instead of the video adapter item 346830,
the audio/video node, item F441 (generating up to 4 risers), may be used. In this mode
one of the previous conditions, with less Handsets and a longer distance on the C LINE,
is recreated.

BT00645-a-EN

2 In/out HA

BTicino 336904 cable

Cable section mm2

BTicinor L4669 cable

Cable section mm

0.28 mm2

Maximum LINE D distance Entrance panel - Door lock

A pair of the multi-pair
data cable C9881U/5E

Maximum LINE C distance, Power supply - furthest Handset (1)

2 WIRE VDE system 333

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344832
Max. distances and features of cables in SINGLE-FAMILY VIDEO SYSTEMS

The HANDSETS classed as (BASE) are: BASE SWING video handset;
The HANDSETS classed as (TRADITIONAL) are: PIVOT, SWING, SPRINT, POLYX VIDEO;
The HANDSETS classed as (ADVANCED) are: POLYX VIDEO DISPLAY, AXOLUTE VIDEO
DISPLAY, AXOLUTE VIDEO STATION, AXOLUTE N&W VIDEO STATION, POLYX MEMORY STATION.
System created using traditional handsets and at least one base
swing handset - black and white entrance panel

System created using advanced or traditional handsets and at least
one base swing handset - colour entrance panel

Maximum LINE A distance, Entrance panel - furthest Handset

Cable section mm

Cable section mm2

A pair of the multi-pair
data cable C9881U/5E

135

5 S-family HA/pushbutton EP

200

140

135

140

165

5 S-family HA/EP with local power
supply

200

140

165

Telephone twisted
pair - 0.28 mm2

BTicino 336904 cable

2 normal cables
>0.2 mm2

A pair of the multi-pair
data cable C9881U/5E

Cable section mm2

Telephone twisted
pair - 0.28 mm2

Cable section mm2

BTicino 336904 cable

Maximum LINE C distance, Power supply - furthest Handset (1)

2 normal cables
>0.2 mm2

Maximum LINE C distance, Power supply - furthest Handset (1)

A pair of the multi-pair
data cable C9881U/5E

Telephone twisted
pair - 0.28 mm2

140

200

BTicino 336904 cable

200

2 normal cables
>0.2 mm2

A pair of the multi-pair
data cable C9881U/5E

5 S-family HA/EP with local power
supply

BTicino 336904 cable

5 S-family HA/pushbutton EP

2 normal cables
>0.2 mm2

Telephone twisted
pair - 0.28 mm2

100

5 In/out HA

100

5 HA (shunted)

100

5 HA (shunted)

100

2 pushbuttons

200

115

Entrance panel with local power supply

200

140

120

BT00645-a -EN

Note (1): LINE C valid for SFERA (342170 + 342510 + 342240), SFERA (342170 +
342550 + 342240), SFERA A/V (342560 + 342240) or LINEA 2000 entrance
panels.

334 2 WIRE VDE system

S+S– clamps

30 m

BTicino 336904 cable

2 normal cables
>0.2 mm2

A pair of the multi-pair
data cable C9881U/5E

Cable section mm2

Telephone twisted
pair - 0.28 mm2

Cable section mm2

BTicino 336904 cable

Maximum LINE D distance, Entrance panel - Door lock

2 normal cables
>0.2 mm2

Maximum LINE B distance, Entrance panel - Power supply

30 m

A pair of the multi-pair
data cable C9881U/5E

Telephone twisted
pair - 0.28 mm2

5 In/out HA

50 m

100 m

Note (1): LINE C valid for SFERA (342170 + 342510 + 342240), SFERA (342170 +
342550 + 342240), SFERA A/V (342560 + 342240) or LINEA 2000 entrance
panels.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344832
Maximum distances and cable features for connection of the ADDITIONAL POWER SUPPLY

100

A pair of the multi-pair
data cable C9881U/5E

SWING BASE
video handset
344832

WARNING: For situations or installation conditions other than the ones listed in
this document (e.g. different entrance panels), the distances may be calculated
using the YouDiagram software (this can be downloaded free of charge from the
www.international.bticino.com website - ASSISTANCE AND TOOLS - TECHNICAL
SOFTWARE.

Maximum distance for base SWING video handset additional power supply

Telephone twisted
pair - 0.28 mm2

2 normal cables
>0.2 mm2

Cable section mm2

BTicino 336904 cable

Maximum LINE distance between the power supply and the entrance panel

PRI

346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

Additional power
supply 346020
BT00645-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 335

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SPRINT L2
Handset

344242

Description

Front view

2 WIRE handset that cannot be fitted with accessories, wall mounted. It has a door
lock release pushbutton, and a pushbutton that can be configured for auxiliary functions
(staircase light switching on, entrance panel activation, call to the switchboard). If
installed in video, or mixed audio/video systems, as the last apartment line or riser
device, it must include a line termination, item 3499, with IN-OUT connection on the
handset itself. The ringtone volume can be adjusted to three different levels using the
appropriate selector.

Technical data

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
3.5 mA
35 mA
5 – 40 °C

Dimensional data

View without lid

BT00646-b-EN

78 mm

194 mm

C
54,5 mm

Legend

1. Ringtone volume selector, adjustable to three different levels
2. Door lock release pushbutton
3. Auxiliary function pushbutton (configurable) - see configuration
4. Configurator socket
5. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps

336 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344242
Configuration

The handset MUST be configured by physically connecting the configurators to the
appropriate sockets as follows:
N - handset number
The N configurator assigns to each handset an identification number (1 - 99)
within the system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order. In case
of handsets with parallel connection (max 3), these must be configured using the
same N configurator.

P - auxiliary function pushbutton
The configurator connected to P allocates the operating mode to the auxiliary
function pushbutton, as shown below:
(P = 0 no configurator connected) - staircase light switching on/activation of
the additional door lock
(P = 1 – 8) - activation of the entrance panel configured with P = 1-8
(P = 9) - entrance panel activation configured with P = 0 (corresponds to
no configurator connected) or call to the main switchboard.
P

BT00646-b-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 337

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SPRINT handset
(without the possibility of fitting with accessories)

344202

Description
2 WIRE handset that cannot be fitted with accessories, wall mounted or table top installation.
Whit door lock opening key.
Bell volume adjustable on 3 levels.
1

Related items
Item 337242 Handset table-top base
Item 336803 AMP cable for connection on table-top base

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
5 mA
35 mA
5 - 40°C

Legend
1 - Door lock key
2 - Bell volume adjustment

Dimensional data
101 mm

1
Wall mounted installation

216 mm

56 mm

1
2

c la c k

c la c k
Handset suitable for wall mounted installation
without the need of any accessories
Configuration
The handset must be physically configured:
N

Table installation
1

BT00647-a -EN

N - handset number
The N configurator assigns to each handset an identification number within the AUDIO
system.
The handsets must be configured in progressive order.
In case of handsets with parallel connection (max 3)2 inside the apartment without item
346850 apartment interface, these must be configured
c
kusing the same N configurator.

la c

P - entrance panel association
the P configurator identifies the associated EP.

338 2 WIRE VDE system

336803
5 - Brown
6 - Brown-white

Table installation of the handset
with base item 337242

TECHNICAL SHEETS

SPRINT handset
(that can be fitted with accessories)
Description
2 WIRE handset that can be fitted with accessories, wall mounted or table top installation.
It has auxiliary function pushbuttons.
It can be accessorised with additional pushbuttons and signalling LED (traditional
wiring), as well as call exclusion card, item 346800. Using the configuration procedure,
the user can decide which function to associate to the auxiliary function pushbutton.
When the item 344212 handset is installed on video or mixed audio/video systems as
the last device of the riser, or apartment line, an INPUT/OUTPUT termination, item 3499,
must be connected to the handset itself.

344212

P - Auxiliary function pushbutton
The auxiliary function pushbutton on the handset item 344212 can be used to perform
several functions, determined by the value of the configurator connected to P.
Configurator in P
0
1 - 7

Auxiliary pushbutton function
Light actuator control
Activation of the audio function on the entrance panel
configured with P = 1 to 7
Call to the Switchboard, in systems with the 8/2-WIRE
interface item 346150

Related items
item 337242
item 346800
item 336803
item 337430
item 3499

Handset table-top base
Extra bell and/or call exclusion card
AMP cable for connection on table-top base
Additional pushbutton
Line termination

Technical data

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
5 mA
35 mA
5 - 40°C

Legend

Dimensional data
101 mm

1 - Door lock key
2 - Key for auxiliary functions
3 - Bell volume adjustment

56 mm

216 mm

Wall mounted installation

cla ck

Handset suitable for wall
mounted installation
without the need of any accessories
Table installation

Configuration
1

BT00648-a -EN

The handset must be physically configured:
N - handset number
The N configurator assigns to each handset an identification
number within the system. The handsets must be configured in
progressive order.
In case of handsets with parallel connection (max 3) inside the
apartment without item 346850 apartment interface, these must
be configured using the same N configurator.

c la c k

336803
5 - Brown
6 - Brown-white

Table installation of the handset
with base item 337242

2 WIRE VDE system 339

TECHNICAL SHEETS

PIVOT
Handset

344032

Description
2 WIRE PIVOT handset for wall mounted, flush mounted, or table top installation. It has
door lock release, staircase light and EP activation keys.
The device offers the possibility of selecting among 16 already programmed bells for
floor call, main entrance panel, INTERCOM CALL, and secondary entrance panel. The call
volume can be set on three levels: high, medium and disabled (this condition is signalled
by a flashing red LED).
It also has a call secrecy function. It is connected to the system using the removable
clamp supplied.
Wall mounting bracket supplied as standard.
WARNING:

1
2
3

Table installation is possible in video or mixed audio/video
systems where the wiring to the handset uses floor shunt item
346841 or the audio/video node item F441.

5
7

Related items
item 346812 4 key small block for auxiliary functions - white
item 337102 table-top support - white
NOTE: for flush mounted installation refer to the specific accessories of the MULTIBOX
range.
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

ON
OFF

1
ET

BUS

18 – 27 Vdc
5 mA
35 mA
5 - 40°C

Dimensional data

68,5 mm

BT00649-a -EN

210 mm

70 mm

340 2 WIRE VDE system

Legend
1 - electronic call with volume adjustable on 3 levels: high, medium, disabled
(the excluded call is signalled by a flashing red LED).
2 - Entrance panel activation
3 - Staircase light key
4 - Door lock key
5 - Extensible cord capped on both ends with RJ connectors
6 - Socket for 4 key small block (optional)
7 - Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
8 - Configurator socket
9 - Plug-in clamp for the connection of the 2 WIRE BUS, additional power supply, and
auxiliary floor call function, as well as extra bell.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344032
Configuration
N – handset number
The N configurator assigns to each handset an identification number within the system.
The handsets must be configured in progressive order. In case of handsets with parallel
connection (max 3 inside the same apartment without item 346850), these must be
configured using the same N configurator.

Configurator in P
0-9

key function
Activation of the audio function on the entrance panel
(configured with P=0-9)

Configurator in P
0-9

key function
Entrance panel door lock release with handset idle

P – entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the associated EP or the first entrance panel on which the
audio is activated when the
key is pressed for the first time, as well as which
door lock is activated when the
key is pressed while the handset is idle.

Programming of bells
Bell selection from MAIN ENTRANCE
PANEL (S=0 - S=4)

Bell selection from SECONDARY
ENTRANCE PANEL (S=0 - S=5)

FLOOR CALL bell selection

INTERCOM CALL bell selection

RESET

BT00649-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 341

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Iryde Touch Phone
Description

345020 - 345021
Front view

2 wire telephone and video handset for wall mounted installation (with optional
bracket, item 345024) or table-top version (with optional support, item 345023). It has
a 16/9, 4.3” LCD colour touch screen display with icon navigation menu, which can be
customised using a PC for the management of the functions:
- telephone;
- video door entry
- MY HOME automation: temperature control, sound system, automation scenarios,
burglar alarm.
The device also features:
- backlit keypad with blue LED.
- handset with magnet for logic release functions through the Hall sensor fitted inside
the base, with extendable spiral cable. On the back of the receiver is a loudspeaker for
the handsfree function.
Programming and configuration using the TiIrydeTouch Phone software supplied with
the product.

- ON
- With additional power supply (1-2)
Operating temperature:

6
18 – 27 Vdc

Technical data

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Maximum absorptions from the BUS:
- Standby

Keypad

35 mA and up to 160 mA when the telephone
functions are used.
350 mA
20 mA
5 – 45 °C

Legend

342 2 WIRE VDE system

.,?

11
12
13

14
Rear view

16 17 18
ART. 345021
PSTN

BUS

2 1

OFF

ON
N PM

BT00650-a -EN

1. Handsfree loudspeaker
2. Handset
3. LCD colour touch screen display: it displays the user menus and shows the images
recorded from the entrance panel and from other cameras
4. Handsfree microphone
5. Backlit keypad
6. Mini USB PC connection
7. Call forwarding and repeat/pause telephone function keys
8. Telephone address book key
9. EP switching on and camera cycling key
10. Stair lights switching on key
11. Call exclusion key: press once to disable the ringtone (telephone and video door entry
system), and press again to enable. Steady red LED with ringtone disabled, flashing for
incoming call and ringtone disabled
12. Handsfree enable/disable key. Green LED when enabled
13. Main EP door lock release key. Notification LED:
14. - off when the door lock is idle and the door is locked, red when the door is open
15. - red flashing when the Office function is active
16. * and # keys used for telephone services
17. Line termination ON/OFF switch
18. PSTN telephone line or PABX switchboard connector
19. 2 wire video SCS/BUS connector
20. 1-21) power supply connector
21. Configurator socket
22. Bracket fixing screw.
Note: 1) The telephone functions are still ensured in case of power cut to the SCS/BUS,
provided that an additional power supply is present. (1= –; 2= +)

TECHNICAL SHEETS

345020 - 345021
Dimensional Data

Configuration

Iryde Touch Phone can be configured in two different modes:
- Basic configuration: when switched on for the first time, the product asks the
user to select the language. After this has been done, if no physical configurators are
present, the device displays a main page showing the video door entry system icon
(inside which, standard door entry system commands can be found: camera, door
lock release, intercom, automatic cycling), the telephone icon, and the settings icon.
The basic configuration can also be performed using physical configurators: N (address
of the device within the video door entry system), P (address of the EP associated to the
device)

120
mm

235 mm

22 mm

Rules, certification, marks

- Configuration using the PC: using the TiIrydeTouchPhone software, it gives the
possibility of configuring the main menu page without being limited to a pre-set number
of functions. Each function may be customised in terms of type, parameter, and text.
PC configuration provides:
- better flexibility in the creation of the menu;
- customisation of text;
- functionalities for the management of the MY HOME automation systems.

Iryde Touch Phone 345020 – 345021 complies with the 1999/5EC directive, certified
following the current regulations listed below:
• EN 60950-1:2006-04 + EN 60950-1/A11:2009-03
• EN 50090-2-2/Ec:1997-03 + EN 50090-2-2/A1:2002-01+ EN 50090-2-2/A2:2007-04

Main functions

• Home automation functions: using the software, it is possible to configure the
pages for the control of the home automation systems installed inside the home.
The available pages are: alarms (alarm log display), sound system (programming of
the rooms and source names), temperature control (management of the 4 zone and 99
zone system), execution of scenarios.

BT00650-a -EN

• Simultaneous switching on with additional power supply: it is possible to connect up
to 4 ITPs with no additional power supply. In case of simultaneous switching on of several
menus, display brightness limitation occurs. In system with or without PABX switchboard, where however the PSTN telephone line and the SCS BUS are connected using
the star wiring solution, the image from the camera is visible on all the ITPs, provided
that these are powered individually using the additional power supply (item 346020).
In general, when installing systems in apartments with ITPs connected to the telephone line, the installation of the apartment interface, item 346850, is also required.

• Ringtones: stored in the ITP, can be associated to specific events: door entry system,
telephone, and intercom call, alarms, etc. The ringtones are played by the loudspeaker
used for the handsfree function. It is possible to update the ringtones, with Wav or
MP3 files, using the configuration software.

2 WIRE VDE system 343

TECHNICAL SHEETS

345020 - 345021
- Address book: using the telephone menu, the address book can be used for the
following functions: add a contact, delete a contact, change a contact, select and
call a contact, customise a contact by associating a photo to the number (using the
software), management of several numbers (max 3) for each contact.

Telephone services

• Calling a number on the PSTN line: using the appropriate keypad command, the
user can select the PSTN telephone line on which to make the call. ITP is capable of
selecting a telephone number on the PSTN line in touch tone mode (DTMF).

• Automatic redial of the last external number.

• Pager: Press the dedicated icon to communicate with handsets and telephones with
handsfree function.

• Putting a call on and off hold on the telephone line: the extension engaged in the
call can put the user of the PSTN line on hold by pressing the “R/HOLD” key. While on
hold the extension can:
- enable a permitted service.
- restart the conversation by replacing the handset (call return).
- restart the conversation on hold by pressing the “R/HOLD” key again.

• Answering incoming calls.

• Answering a second call.

• Differentiated call: when a call arrives, the user has the possibility of distinguishing
between type of calls (intercommunicating, from the outside line, or video door entry
system call), by using different sound tracks.

• Transfer without consent in case of free tone: in case of installation with PABX,
after pressing “R” and selecting the number of the extension to which to transfer the
conversation, the user can replace the handset once a free tone is heard.

• CID service: upon arrival of a PSTN line call, the caller number or name is displayed (if
the number is included in the address book), together with the photo of the caller (if
present in the private address book). The availability of the service is subjected to the
activation of the function for forwarding information by the central unit.

• Transferring a door entry system and DOSA outside line call: in case of installation
with PABX.

• Calling a number on the private, or system, address book using the PSTN line.

• Extension call (intercommunicating call): possibility for the extensions to talk to
each other. The selection of the extension to call can be made in two ways:
- by entering on the code of the extension to call on the keypad (from 401 to 408)
- by selecting the extension to call from the menu, and then pressing “OK” to confirm
the call
• General call of all the extensions: it is possible to make an announcement on all
CTB and ITP extensions using the loudspeaker on the bases of the telephones. To
activate the service lift the handset and press the dedicated icon. The first telephone
engaging the line enters in conversation with the caller, excluding all the other
extensions called. If no answer is received within the activation time, the service is
interrupted and the caller receives a time-out tone. The service can be interrupted by
replacing the handset. Press the “pager” key during the activation time or when the
time-out tone is heard from the handset to reactivate the service. The microphone
used for the pager function can be the handset or the handsfree microphone.
BT00650-a-EN

344 2 WIRE VDE system

• DISA service, selection of the handset from the outside line using the voice
menu: in case of installation with PABX.
• Day/lunchtime/night scenarios for the various telephone lines: in case of
installation with PABX.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

345020 - 345021
Wiring diagrams

One-family system without PABX

Telephone line

BUS

BUS
ON

OFF

a b
IN

PLT1
OUT
a b

PLT1

345020

PSTN

345020

PSTN

PSTN
OFF

BUS

OFF

345020

BUS

345020

346000
346830
BUS
TK

Entrance
panel

BUS
PI

BUS 2 1

BT00650-a -EN

BUS

230 Vac

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

Quantity

PLT1
345020
346830
346000

Protection of telephone line
Iryde Touch Phone
Video adapter
AV Power supply, 230 V

1
4
1
1

2 WIRE VDE system 345

TECHNICAL SHEETS

345020 - 345021
230 Vac

One-family system with PABX
346020

PRI

346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

2
PSTN

BUS

345020*
ON

PSTN

BUS

PSTN

345020*

PSTN

BUS

PSTN

345020*

345020*
Telephone
line

110-240 Vac
346830
BUS
TK

346000

BUS
PI
Speed

Full

Link

Aux

System

10W39 06

345829

PABX 288 exp
PRI: 110 - 240V~
210 - 130mA
50/60 Hz
PD max 13W

BUS 2 1

345829

230 Vac

BT00650-a -EN

Entrance
panel

346 2 WIRE VDE system

a b
IN

PLT1

OUT
a b

PLT1

Fax

Cordless

Note (*): configure the ITPs (using the Menu or the Software) to recognise that the
PABX switchboard is present

a b
IN

PLT1

Telephone

ITEM

DESCRIPTION

Quantity

PLT1
345020
346830
346000
345829
346020

Protection of telephone line
Iryde Touch Phone
Video adapter
AV Power supply, 230 V
Switchboard
Power supply

2
5
1
1
1
1

TECHNICAL SHEETS

PIVOT
black & white video handset

344102

Description
2 WIRE PIVOT video handset for wall mounted, flush mounted, or table top installation.
Black & white 4” flat monitor. It has door lock release, staircase light, and entrance panel
activation keys.
The device offers the possibility of selecting among 16 already programmed bells for
floor call, main entrance panel, intercom call, and secondary entrance panel. The call
volume can be set on three levels: high, medium and disabled (this condition is signalled
by a flashing red LED).
It also has a call secrecy function. It is connected to the system using
the removable clamp supplied.
Wall mounting bracket supplied as standard.

1
8

7
6

5
4

Related items
item 346812 4 key small block for auxiliary functions - white
item 337122 table-top support - white

NOTE: for flush mounted installation refer to the specific accessories of the MULTIBOX
range.

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
5 mA
290 mA
5 - 40°C

OFF

BUS

1
NP

Dimensional data

11
210 mm

68,5 mm

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

4” TFT colour monitor
Monitor colour, contrast, and brightness adjustment
Extensible cord capped on both ends with RJ connectors
Door lock key
Staircase light key
Entrance panel activation/cycling
Electronic call with volume adjustable on 3 levels: high, medium, disabled (the
excluded call is signalled by a flashing red LED)
8. 4-key block housing (optional)
9. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
10. Configurator socket
11. MASTER-SLAVE Jumper (remove to enable SLAVE)
12. Plug-in clamp for the connection of the 2 WIRE BUS, additional power supply, and
auxiliary floor call function, as well as extra bell.

BT00651-a-EN

210 mm

Legend

2 WIRE VDE system 347

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344102
Configuration
N – handset number
The N configurator assigns each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order. The handsets must
be configured in progressive order.Handsets with parallel connection (max 3 are
allowed inside apartments without item 346850) must be configured using the same
N configurator. In parallel with the main video handset, additional handsets, video
handsets and/or bells may be installed.
P – entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the entrance panel associated, or the first entrance panel to
activate before pressing the key
and which door lock is activated when the key
is pressed while the video handset is idle.

MASTER – SLAVE selection jumper
In multi-family systems with several video handsets (max. 3) connected in parallel
inside the same apartment (without using item 346850), both the MASTER and the
SLAVE handsets must be set, by connecting or removing the selection jumper.

N P

Connected
jumper

MASTER

Disconnected
jumper

MASTER

SLAVE

When a call is received, the MASTER video handset of the system rings and switches on,
while the video handsets configured as SLAVE only rings.
If the call is answered from a SLAVE unit, the MASTER unit switches off again, while the
monitor of the SLAVE unit the call has been answered from comes on.
When a pushbutton of
SLAVE unit is pressed before answering, the MASTER
handset monitor switches off, while the monitor of SLAVE on which the pushbutton has
been pressed switches on, but without audio connection.
Programming of bells
Bell selection from MAIN ENTRANCE
PANEL (S=0 - S=4)
1

Bell selection from SECONDARY
ENTRANCE PANEL (S=0 - S=5)

1 1

1 1 1 1

1
3

FLOOR CALL bell selection

2 2

1 1

INTERCOM CALL bell selection

2 2

3 3

1 1

2 2

3 3

1 1

3 3

1 1

1 1 11

2 2

2 2 22

1616

16 16 1616

16 16

RESET

RESET
RESET

BT00651-a -EN

OK OK

348 2 WIRE VDE system

4 4

RESET
RESET
RESET
RESET

OK OK OKOK

1616

4 4

RESET RESET
RESET

OKOK

4 4

RESET RESET
RESET

OKOK

TECHNICAL SHEETS

PIVOT
colour video handset

344122

Description
2 WIRE PIVOT video handset for wall mounted, flush mounted, or table top installation.
TFT colour 4” flat monitor. It has door lock release, staircase light, and entrance panel
activation keys.
The device offers the possibility of selecting among 16 already programmed bells for
floor call, main entrance panel, intercom call, and secondary entrance panel. The call
volume can be set on three levels: high, medium and disabled (this condition is signalled
by a flashing red LED).
It also has a call secrecy function. It is connected to the system using
the removable clamp supplied.
Wall mounting bracket supplied as standard.

1
8

7
6

5
4

Related items
item 346812 4 key small block for auxiliary functions - white
item 337122 table-top support - white

NOTE: for flush mounted installation refer to the specific accessories of the MULTIBOX
range.

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
5 mA
290 mA
5 - 40°C

OFF

BUS

1
NP

Dimensional data

11
210 mm

68,5 mm

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

4” TFT colour monitor
Monitor colour, contrast, and brightness adjustment
Extensible cord capped on both ends with RJ connectors
Door lock key
Staircase light key
Entrance panel activation/cycling
Electronic call with volume adjustable on 3 levels: high, medium, disabled (the
excluded call is signalled by a flashing red LED)
8. 4-key block housing (optional)
9. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
10. Configurator socket
11. MASTER-SLAVE Jumper (remove to enable SLAVE)
12. Plug-in clamp for the connection of the 2 WIRE BUS, additional power supply,
and auxiliary floor call function, as well as extra bell.

BT00652-a-EN

210 mm

Legend

2 WIRE VDE system 349

TECHNICAL SHEETS

344122
Configuration
N – handset number
The N configurator assigns each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order. The handsets must
be configured in progressive order.Handsets with parallel connection (max 3 are
allowed inside apartments without item 346850) must be configured using the same
N configurator. In parallel with the main video handset, additional handsets, video
handsets and/or bells may be installed.
P – entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the entrance panel associated, or the first entrance panel to
activate before pressing the key
and which door lock is activated when the key
is pressed while the video handset is idle.

N P

Connected
jumper

MASTER

Disconnected
jumper

MASTER

SLAVE

Bell selection from SECONDARY
ENTRANCE PANEL (S=0 - S=5)

1 1

1 1 1 1

1
3

FLOOR CALL bell selection

2 2

1 1

INTERCOM CALL bell selection

2 2

3 3

1 1

2 2

3 3

1 1

3 3

1 1

1 1 11

2 2

2 2 22

1616

16 16 1616

16 16

RESET

RESET
RESET

BT00652-a -EN

OK OK

350 2 WIRE VDE system

4 4

RESET
RESET
RESET
RESET

OK OK OKOK

1616

4 4

RESET RESET
RESET

OKOK

4 4

RESET RESET
RESET

OKOK

TECHNICAL SHEETS

PIVOT 4 key
handset accessory

346812

Description
4 key accessory for handsets item 344032, and video handsets item 344102, 344122, .
It must be installed inside the handset, in the preset location.
It can be used to perform the listed functions, based on the type of configuration set:
- Intercom call among various system devices and apartments (max. 5)
- control of actuators for additional door locks
- control of actuators for general uses and auto-switching on of the entrance panel
- mixed activations
- paging function through the 2 WIRE sound system
- enabling/disabling of home automation scenarios
- apartment intercom in two-family system

Legend
1234-

Key 1
Key 2
Key 3
Key 4

The device must be configured fisicamente per stabilirne la operating mode:
M - Operating mode
It sets the operating mode allocated to the individual keys of the accessory block.
The mode changes depending on whether the apartment interface, item 346850, has
been installed or not.

MOD

Configuration

1
2
3
4

Configuration
Selection of MOD configurators
MODE
FUNCTION OF KEYS WITHOUT item 346850
MOD=
Direct switching on of the EPs
1 Direct switching on of the EPs configured with P+1
2 Direct switching on of the EPs configured with P+2
3 Direct switching on of the EPs configured with P+3
4 Direct switching on of the EPs configured with P+4

Control of the actuator for generic loads (Item 346200)
1 346200 configured with MOD=9 and P=P+1
2 346200 configured with MOD=9 and P=P+2
3 346200 configured with MOD=9 and P=P+3
4 346200 configured with MOD=9 and P=P+4
MOD= 1
Intercom among the apartment with N-1-5
MOD= 2
Intercom among apartments with interface item 346850 – N=1-4

FOR MULTI-FAMILY SYSTEMS WITHIN THE APARTMENT WITH item 346850

Intercom among Handsets with N=1-5
Intercom among apartments configured with N=1-4
BT00653-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 351

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346812
Configuration
Selection of MOD configurators
MODE FUNCTION OF KEYS WITHOUT item 346850
1
MOD = 3
Auto-switching on of EPs configured with P+1
2

Door lock control for EPs configured with P+1

Keys 3 and 4 for intercom among the handsets

of different apartments config. with N=1-3
MOD = 5
Control of door lock relay with:

Actuator for generic loads (Item 346200)
1

346200 configured with MOD=5 and P=P+1
2

346200 configured with MOD=5 and P=P+2
3

346200 configured with MOD=5 and P=P+3
4

346200 configured with MOD=5 and P=P+4

Door lock actuator (Item 346230 - Item 346260)
1

Actuator configured with P=1
2

Actuator configured with P=2
3

Actuator configured with P=3
4

Actuator configured with P=4
MOD = 6

1
MOD = 7
Intercom among apart. devices (general call)
2
(two-family
Intercom with devices of other apart. (general call)
3
installations)
Door lock control for EPs config. with P+1

Door lock control for EPs config. with P+2
1
MOD = 7
Intercom within the same apartment
2
(multy-family
NOT USED
3
installations
Door lock control for EPs config. with P+1
4
config. with N = 3)
Door lock control for EPs config. with P+2
MOD = 9

BT00653-a -EN

352 2 WIRE VDE system

FOR MULTI-FAMILY SYSTEMS WITHIN THE APARTMENT WITH item 346850
1
Auto-switching on of local entrance panels
2
Door lock control for the local EP (direct mode)
Keys 3 and 4 for intercom among the handsets of the
apartment configured with N=1-3

Keys 1 , 2 and
configured with N=1 - 4
4
Paging function

for intercom among handsets

Scenario central unit control (Item F420) A=0 and PL=1
1
Activate scenario 1
2
Activate scenario 2
3
Activate scenario 3
4
Activate scenario 4

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346812
Configuration
Example 1 - MOD = 0
MOD=0
1
2
3
4

PE
principale

PE
secondario (P+1)
P=0

BUS

P=1

MOD=9

Alimentatore

P=2

MOD=9

346200

P=3

MOD=9

346200

P=4

346200

BUS
PI

BUS
TK

346000
PS

230V a. c.

BUS

2 1

346830

5
1

6
2

C NO

8
4

7
3

5
1

6
2

7
3

C NO

8
4

5
1

BUS

6
2

7
3

C NO

8
4

BUS

230V a. c.

Direct auto-switching on of the second entrance panel and activation of general use actuators

MOD=0
1
2
3
4

PE
principale

BUS

MOD=9
Alimentatore

P=1

MOD=9

346200
BUS
TK

P=2

MOD=9

346200

P=3

MOD=9

346200

P=4

346200

BUS
PI

346000
PS

230V a. c.

BUS

2 1

346830

NC
5
1

6
2

7
3

C NO

8
4

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

C NO
5
1

6
2

230V a. c.

C NO

8
4

5
1

6
2

7
3

BUS

230V a. c.

C NO

8
4

BT00653-a-EN

BUS

7
3

Activation of general use actuators

2 WIRE VDE system 353

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346812
Configuration
Example 2 - MOD = 1
In multi-family systems, the use of the accessory item 346812, appropriately
configured (MOD=1) enables intercommunication among up to 5 system users.
Inside the apartment building there may only be one group of up to 5 users that may
be able to use the intercommunicating function. For this purpose, the 5 users of the
intercommunicating function must be entered in the pushbutton panel as shown below.

Handset with N=1
Pushbutton 1
Pushbutton 2
Pushbutton 3
Pushbutton 4
Handset with N=2
Pushbutton 1
Pushbutton 2
Pushbutton 3
Pushbutton 4
Handset with N=3
Pushbutton 1
Pushbutton 2
Pushbutton 3
Pushbutton 4
Handset with N=4
Pushbutton 1
Pushbutton 2
Pushbutton 3
Pushbutton 4
Handset with N=5
Pushbutton 1
Pushbutton 2
Pushbutton 3
Pushbutton 4

N=5

N=4

N=4
N=3
N=2
N=1

N=3
N=2
N=1

The handset keys call in succession the handsets configured from 1 to 5 in N, excluding
themselves.
Example: If the call is made from the Handset configured with N=3
- Key 1 calls the handset configured with N=1
- Key 2 calls the handset configured with N=2
- Key 3 calls the handset configured with N=4
- Key 4 calls the handset configured with N=5

Call to the
Handset 2
Handset 3
Handset 4
Handset 5
Call to the
Handset 1
Handset 3
Handset 4
Handset 5
Call to the
Handset 1
Handset 2
Handset 4
Handset 5
Call to the
Handset 1
Handset 2
Handset 3
Handset 5
Call to the
Handset 1
Handset 2
Handset 3
Handset 4

1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4

Example 3 - MOD=2
In multi-family systems with apartment interface item 346850, the item accessory
346812 configured with (MOD=2) allows a maximum of 4 users to intercommunicate
among themselves (intercom external to the apartment).
The handset keys call in succession the apartments configured with N=1 – N=2N=3-N=4.

Example:
- Key 1 calls the apartment configured with N=1
- Key 2 calls the apartment configured with N=2
- Key 3 calls the apartment configured with N=3
- Key 4 calls the apartment configured with N=4

Example 4 - MOD = 5
MOD=5
1
2
3
4

PE
principale

BUS

MOD=5

BT00653-a-EN

Alimentatore

P=1

MOD=5

346200
BUS
TK

P=2

MOD=5

346200

P=3

P=4

346200

BUS
PI

BUS
TK

BUS
PI

346000
PS

230V a. c.

BUS

2 1

346830

NC
5
1

6
2

7
3

C NO

8
4

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

C NO
5
1

6
2

7
3

BUS

Activation of additional door locks

354 2 WIRE VDE system

230V a. c.

C NO

346230

8
4

BUS

230V a. c.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346812
Configuration
Example 5 - MOD = 9
F420

DE L

A PL

Scenario 1/16

Scenario 2/16

Scenario 3/16

Scenario 4/16

MOD=9

Control of the first 4 scenarios (1-2-3-4) of the 16 saved in the F420 scenario module.
Example 6 - MOD = 3 (mixed mode)
- Key
- Key
- Key
- Key

Auto-switching on of the EP (configured with P+1)
Activation of the door lock of the EP (configured with P+1), directly, without call
Intercom function
Intercom function

1
2
3
4

Auto-switching on of the EP (P+1)
door lock of sec. EP (P+1)
intercom call to N=1
intercom call to N=2

1
2
3
4

Auto-switching on of the EP (P+1)
door lock of EP (P+1)
intercom call to N=1
intercom call to N=3

1
2
3
4

MOD=3

Auto-switching on of the EP (P+1)
door lock of EP (P+1)
intercom call to N=2
intercom call to N=3

1
2
3
4

MOD=3

BUS

BUS
PE (P+1)

P=0

P=1

BT00653-a-EN

2
2

Alimentatore
BU S
TK

BU S
PI

346000
clack

clack

BUS
230V a. c.

2 1
346830

NOTE: The operating mode of the intercom
function is the same as explained in example 2.
In this case however the intercommunication
is only established among 3 apartment, or 3
handsets for one-family installations.

2 WIRE VDE system 355

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346812
Configuration
Example 7 - MOD = 3 (mixed mode) with item 346850
For systems with apartment interface item 346850
- Key
- Key
- Key
- Key

Auto-switching on and cycling of local EPs
Activation of the door lock of the local EP directly without call
Intercom function among the apartment handsets
Intercom function among the apartment handsets

1
2
3
4

Apartment 8

Auto-switching on of the local EP
door lock of local EP
intercom call to N=1
intercom call to N=2

1
2
3
4

Auto-switching on of the local EP
door lock of local EP
intercom call to N=1
intercom call to N=3

1
2
3
4

BUS
local PE

2
2

P=1

EXT

BUS

346850

IN T

MOD=3

N= 8
M= 3

MOD=3

Auto-switching on of the local EP
door lock of local EP
intercom call to N=2
intercom call to N=3

Power supply

OF F

BU S
TK

BU S
PI

346000

2 wire
riser

clack

230 Vac

P=0
O

BT00653-a -EN
clack

356 2 WIRE VDE system

BUS

Local
door lock

main PE

2 1
346830

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346812
Configuration
Example 8 - MOD = 7 Intercom in two-family systems
- Key
- Key
- Key
- Key

Calls the handsets of the same apartment (the handsets configured with the same N as the one the call is made from)
Calls the handsets of the other apartment (the handsets configured with a different N from the one the call is made from)
Opens the door lock associated with the EP configured with P + 1
Opens the door lock associated with the EP configured with P + 2

1
2
3
4

Apartment 2

1
2
3
1
24
3
4

Apartment 1

It calls the handsets (general call)
configured with 2 (other devices
in apartment 2), same apartment
intercom

1
2

It calls the handsets (general
call) configured with 1 (devices in
apartment 1), intercom between
apartments

24
3
4

3
1

MOD=7

It calls the handsets (general call)
configured with 1 (other devices
in apartment 1), same apartment
intercom
It calls the handsets (general
call) configured with 2 (devices in
apartment 2), intercom between
apartments

BUS

1
2

BUS

main
PE

main (P+1)
PE

P=0

P=1

2
2
Power supply
BU S
TK

BU S
PI

346000
PS

BUS 2 1
346830

P=2

NOTE: Maximum 3 devices per apartment.
Press repeatedly
for entrance panel cycling.

P=0
O

P=1
O

audio (P+2)
PE

P=2
O

BT00653-a -EN

230 Vac

O
4

NOTE: Maximum 3 PIVOT devices per apartment
with MASTER-SLAVE function.

2 WIRE VDE system 357

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346812
Configuration
Example 9 - MOD = 6
- Key
- Key
- Key
- Key

Intercom
Intercom
Intercom
Paging function using the loudspeakers of the 2 WIRE sound system and melodic bells with M = 1

1
2
3
4

Celing mounted loudspeakers L4566
Intercom call N = 2
Intercom call N = 3
Intercom call N = 4
Paging

1
2
3
4

Intercom call N = 1
Intercom call N = 3
Intercom call N = 4
Paging

1
2
3
4

Intercom call N = 1
Intercom call N = 2
Intercom call N = 4
Paging

1
2
3
4

DIN amplifier
F502

3
MOD=7

M=1
2

A PF M1 M2 M3

3499

2
2

OUT 1 OUT2

OUT3

OUT 4

OUT

346000

F441

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

IN 4

BUS 2 1

SCS

230 Vac

main
PE
P=0

RCA input L4560
2

S M1 M2

BT00653-a -EN

1
Press key 4 to communicate with the outside using the loudspeakers of the 2 WIRE sound system and the Melodic bells M = 1.
The “paging” function can be used, for example, for communications inside supermarkets or offices: press key 4 to switch the selected sound source off and activate the
audio on the loudspeakers. Once the handset has been replaced the sound source comes on again.

358 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346812

02'

Assembly, Installation

BT00653-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 359

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Melodic bells
Description

CK
CLA

349412-349413-346982-346983-346984
1

Flush mounted 2 WIRE melodic bell.
It’s used (in the same way as an intercom handset) as a call repeater or pager. It includes
a potentiometer on the front for the adjustment of the bell volume. It can be connected
to the PC (using a serial connection) for the selection of the melody.
The bell has the same absorption of a handset with extra bell. It is therefore possible to
install systems with maximum 3 devices (handsets, video handsets and bells) within the
same apartment; (max 5 for one-family systems).
The bell programming software (TiRing) may be downloaded from the www.bticino.it
website free of charge.

CK
CLA

Related items
3559 (serial interface for connection to the PC)
3499 (line termination), use if the device is the last device of the line
F422 (SCS/SCS gateway), use in systems integrated with the burglar-alarm system to
receive burglar-alarm, tampering, and auxiliary notifications.
The device must be completed with the accessories and the front cover plates of the
AXOLUTE, Livinglight, LIGHT TECH residential series.
Refer to the corresponding catalogues.

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand-by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

3
18 - 27 Vdc
10 mA
100 mA
5 - 40°C

Dimensional data
2 DIN modules

Legend
1 - Loudspeaker volume adjustment
2 - Configurator socket
3 - Socket for the connection of the PC serial connector

Configuration
The device must be physically configured in terms of:
N1 - N2 = address of the bell within the system
configure with the same address of an apartment handset.
S = NOT USED
M = Operating mode
M = 0 - operation as extra bell
M = 1 - operation as pager
BT00654-a -EN

360 2 WIRE VDE system

N1 N2 S M

operating mode
bell address

TECHNICAL SHEETS

230 V A/V SCS/BUS power supply
Description
2 wire system power supply unit, to be used in audio systems together with 2 wire
speaker modules, or with the universal speaker unit, item 346991, for the installation
of systems with up to 100 entrance panels (56 when item 346991 is used), as well as
in video or mixed audio/video systems, when using video adapter item 346830, or
the audio/video node item F441, or the multichannel matrix F441M. The device is
also suitable as a power supply for sound systems. Additionally, it can also be used
as supplementary power supply (output 1 – 2) for local supply to advanced preset
handsets. It must be powered at 230 Vac. On the output it provides two power supply
outlets, which can be used in alternative to each other, but not both at the same time
(27Vdc 1.2 A BUS clamps, and 1-2 27Vdc 1.2 A clamps). It is electronically protected
(without fuse) from short-circuit and overload.
It is a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI.
The power supply unit is inside a 8 DIN modules rail enclosure, and its installation must
be in accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
The device must not be configured.

346000

Front view

346000

BUS 2 1
3

Dati tecnici
PRI (Power supply Vac input):
Rated voltage:
220 – 240 Vac
Rated current:
230 – 250 mA
Working voltage range: 207 – 253 Vac
Working frequency range: 50 – 60 Hz
Input power at full load: 44.9 W (max)
Dissipated power:
11.5 W (max)
Input power without load: 4.2 W (max)
Operating temperature: 5 – 40 °C
Protection index:
IP30
SEC (Vdc output):
Rated voltage (BUS):
Rated voltage (1-2):
Rated current:
Rated power:

Legenda
1. Output connection clamps 1=GND – 2=+27Vdc
2. SCS/BUS output connection clamps
3. 230 Vac input connection clamps

27 Vdc +/- 0,1 Vdc
27 Vdc +/- 0.1 Vdc (1=** - 2=**)
0 – 1.2 A
32.4 W

Standards, Certifications, Marks
Standards: CEI EN60065 - CEI 64-8-4 (punto 411.1.2.5)
Marks obtained :

Dimensional data
8 DIN modules

Assembly, Installation
Comply with the following installation requirements:
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures.
- It must be kept away from water drips and sprays.
- Do not to obstruct the air vents.
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least
3 mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used
both to disconnect the power supply from the electric network, and to protect it.
BT00655-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 361

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Audio power supply 230 V

346010

Description
12

2-wire system power supply to be used in audio systems with audio modules or
universal speaker unit, item 346991, for the installation of systems with up to 26
handsets.
On the output it supplies 27 Vdc continuous low voltage, with a maximum current of
250 mA. It’s electronically protected (without fuses) againstshort circuit and overload.
It is a double insulation safety device.
The power supply unit is inside a 6 DIN modules rail enclosure, and its installation must
be in accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
The device must not be configured.
Legend

Technical data
Power supply:
Output voltage of the BUS clamps:
Output voltage of the 1-2 clamps:
Max. dissipated power:
Input power without load :
Operating temperature:
Protection index:

230 Vac +/- 10% @ 50/60 Hz
24 Vdc - 250 mA
12 Vac - 1A
11 W
3.5 W (max)
5 – 40 °C
IP30

1 - Output connection clamps (12 Vac)
2 - BUS output connection clamps (24 Vdc - 250 mA)
3 - 230 Vac input connection clamps

Assembly, Installation
Standards, Certifications, Marks
Standards: CEI EN60065
Marks obtained:

Dimensional data
6 DIN modules

BT00656-a-EN

362 2 WIRE VDE system

Comply with the following installation requirements:
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures.
- It must be kept away from water drips and sprays.
- Do not to obstruct the air vents.
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least
3 mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used both
to disconnect the power supply from the electric network, and to protect it.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

110 – 240 V Audio power supply
Description

346040
Front view

2 WIRE audio system power supply with 6 DIN modular housing.
Power supply 110 – 240 Vac @ 50 – 60 Hz. The output provides 26 Vdc continuous low
voltage, with maximum current of 600 mA. It is electronically protected against overload
and short circuit by means of an integrated fuse (NOT REPLACEABLE). It’s a SELV double
insulation safety device. Operating temperature 5 – 45 °C. The device must be installed
in compliance with current regulations.

PRI

Technical data

PRI

BUS

PRI (AC power supply input):
Rated voltage:
Rated current:
Working voltage range:
Working frequency range:
Input power at full load:
Dissipated power:
Performance at full load:
Power in stand by:
Operating temperature:
Integrated fuse (PRI side):

110 – 240 Vac
370 – 225 mA
100 – 265 V
47 – 63 Hz
20.5 W
4.9 W (max.)
80 % (typ.)
< 1W
5 – 45 °C
F1 T2A 250 V (CANNOT BE REPLACED)

BUS (DC output)
Rated voltage:
Rated current:
Rated power:

26 V
0 – 0,6 A
15.6 W

346040
PRI 110 - 240 V 50 - 60 Hz 370 mA
- 225 mA
BUS 26.0 V 600 mA

BUS

Legend

1. Input connection clamps 110 – 240 Vac
2. Output connection clamps BUS 26 V (0 – 600 mA)

Standards, Certifications, Marks

Standards: CEI EN60950 - CEI 64-8-4 (point 411.1.2.5)

Dimensional data

Size: 6 DIN modules

BT00657-a -EN

Installation

2 WIRE VDE system 363

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Compact power supply 230 V

346030

Description
1

2 DIN module device for:
- basic video door entry systems (e.g. apartment intercom)
- mini SOUND SYSTEMS (absorption up to 600 mA).
It is a double insulation safety device.
The power supply is inside a module plastic rail enclosure, and its installation must be in
accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
The device must not be configured.

PRI

Technical data
PRI (AC power supply input):
Rated voltage:
220 – 240 Vac
Rated current:
200 - 190 mA
Working voltage range:
187 – 265 V
Working frequency range:
47 – 63 Hz
Input power at full load:
21.5 W max
Dissipated power:
5.3 W (max.)
Performance at full load:
80% typ.
Power in stand by:
<1W
Operating temperature:
5 – 40 °C
Integrated fuse (PRI side):
F1 T2A 250V (Cannot be replaced)
SCS A-V; SCS:
Rated voltage:
Rated current:
Rated power:

27 V +/- 100 mV
0 – 0.6 A
16.2 W

Standards, Certifications, Marks
Standards: CEI EN60065 - CEI 64-8-4
Dimensional data
2 DIN modules

SCS A-V

SCS

WARNING : THE (SCS - AV) AND (SCS) OUTPUTS CAN BE USED AT THE
SAME TIME IN RESPECT TO THE MAXIMUM CURRENT ABSORPTION OF
600 mA
Legend
1 - 230 Vac input connection clamps 50-60 Hz
2 - Operating status notification LEDs:
(GREEN ON) - normal operation of the power supply
(RED ON) - output current overload
3 - SCS output connection clamps (BUS 27V)
4 - SCS AV output connection clamps (27 V)
Assembly, Installation
Comply with the following installation requirements:

BT00658-a -EN

364 2 WIRE VDE system

- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures.
- It must be kept away from water drips and sprays.
- Do not to obstruct the air vents.
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least
3 mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used both
to disconnect the power supply from the electric network, and to protect it.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Additional power supply
230 V

346020

Description

2 DIN module devices which allows to:
- locally supply the single video door entry handsets and entrance panels.
- supply some accessories of the Communication and MY HOME catalogues (ex: Web
server, A/V server, scenario programmers, 2 WIRE/IP interface, switch 10/100, ADSL
modem router, Hub-TV and SCS modulator).
It is a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI.
The power supply is enclosed by a 2 DIN module plastic rail enclosure, and its installation
must be in accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
The device must not be configured.

PR I

Technical data

346020
PRI: 220 - 240V~
175-165mA
50/60Hz

PRI (AC power supply input)
Rated voltage:
220 – 240 Vac
Rated current:
180 – 190 mA
Working voltage range:
187 – 265 V
Working frequency range: 47 – 63 Hz
Input power at full load:
20 W max
Dissipated power:
3.8 W (max.)
Performance at full load:
80% typ.
Power in stand by:
<1W
Operating temperature:
5 – 40 °C
Integrated fuse (PRI side): F1 T2A 250V (CANNOT BE REPLACED)
1 - 2 (DC output):
Rated voltage:
Rated current:
Rated power:

1-2: 27Vdc
600mA

2
1- 2

27 V +/- 100 mV
0 – 0.6 A
16.2 W
Legend

Standards, Certifications, Marks
Standards: CEI EN60065
Dimensional data
2 DIN modules

1 - 230 Vac input connection clamps
2 - Operating status notification LEDs:
(GREEN ON) – normal operation of the power supply
(RED ON) – output current overload
3 - Output 1 – 2 connection clamps
Assembly, Installation
Comply with the following installation requirements:
-

BT00659-a-EN

The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures
It must be kept away from water drips and sprays.
Do not to obstruct the air vents.
A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least 3
mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used to
disconnect the power supply from the mains, and to protect it.

2 WIRE VDE system 365

TECHNICAL SHEETS

A/V SCS/BUS cable (white)

336904

Description
This cable is used for the distribution of the power supplies and the operating signals to
all BUS system devices.
The cable consists of a white external sheathing and two twisted flexible conductors
with a section of 0.5 mm2, one brown and one brown/white.
The cable is sold in 200 m coils.
It is thus suitable to be used:
- in the open air, inside trunkings, passage-ways and pipes
- inside walls with suitable pipes.
- laid underground by means of suitable pipes
The white SCS-BUS cable is suitable for underground installation
Technical data
Insulation voltage:
Can be buried:
External sheath colour:
External sheath diameter:
External sheath thickness:
External sheath material:
Number of internal conductors:

450/750 V
YES (see installation notes)
white (RAL 9010)
5.0 +/- 0.1 mm
0.7 mm
PVC (RZ)
2 unshielded twisted flexible conductors with
sheath
Colour of internal conductors:
brown – brown/white
Sheath thickness of internal conductors: 0.40 mm
Sheath diameter of internal conductors: 1.70 mm
Sheath material of internal conductors: XLPE polyethylene
Conductor material:
red electrolytic copper
Conductor section:
0.50 mm2 (16 x 0.20 mm2)
Operating temperature:
(-15) – (+70) °C
Coil length:
200 m
Standards, Certifications, Marks

Reference standards: - It complies with the tests required by the following standards:
EN60811, EN50289, EN50290, EN60228, EN50265-2-1, EN50395, EN50396 as described
in the IMQ CPT 062 document.
Marks obtained:

BT00660-a-EN

366 2 WIRE VDE system

Installation notes
Underground cable installation
The 336904 BUS SCS cable can be installed underground (protected using appropriate
piping), together with other signalling cables, provided the voltage is <50V.
It is however strictly forbidden to install the 336904 cable in the same conduit as power
supply cables with voltages >50V. Failure to comply with the installation requirements
will relieve BTicino of all responsibilities for the operation of the system installed.
Installation together with other cables
Although the construction of the white cable guarantees the necessary electrical
insulation level for installation together with 450/750 V system cables, it is however
not capable of guaranteeing immunity from any electromagnetic disturbances that may
occur when installed in the same conduits used for the power supply cables.
It is therefore strongly recommended that the white BUS/SCS cable and the power
supply cables are installed in separate conduits.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Video adapter

346830

Description
2 WIRES video adapter that must be used wih the power supply item 346000 in the
installation of video systems (or audio/video combined), video door entry systems and
sound systems.
Allows the connection to its 3 BUS clamps. Hence it is possible to realize installations
with 2 video entrance panels and 1 riser and installations with 1 video entrance panel
and 2 risers.
The device must be installed next to the system power supply item 346000.
The device must not be configured.
Related items

BUS
TK

BUS
PI

346000 (2 WIRE system power supply)
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 - 27 Vdc
Operating temperature:
5 - 40°C
Dimensional data
2 DIN modules.

3
Legend
1 - BUS TK output towards the EP (fixed clamp entrance panels)
2 - BUS output towards the handsets (fixed clamp handsets)
3 - BUS PS input from the power supply (removable clamp)

BT00661-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 367

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Apartment interface

346850

Description

Interface to be used to install a dedicated 2-wire system inside the home, isolated from
the riser.
The system downstream the interface may include local CCTV, sound system, and MY
HOME applications control.
It can be used for calls within the building, as well as outside calls.

346850

INT
Technical data

Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
Operating temperature:
5 - 40°C
Dissipated power:
2.25 W
Stand by absorption:
from the INT 15 mA connection
from the EXT 5 mA connection

Maximum absorption in funzionamento :
from the INT 50 mA connection
from the EXT 30 mA connection
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules

EXT

OFF

Legend
1 - Clamp for the connection of the apartment 2 WIRE system
2 - Interface status notification LED:
Flashing green LED = STAND BY
Fixed green LED = EXT-INT connection active
3 - Video signal status notification LED:
Green LED = OK
Green/red LED = operation close to the limit
Red LED = no video signal or limits exceeded
4 - Not used
5 - Configurator socket: N = interface address, M = 3 (connected at the factory)
6 - Clamp for the connection to the 2 WIRE riser
7 - Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch

BT00662-a-EN

368 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346850
Configuration

Installation
example

The device must be physically configured in terms of:
N = device ID number
The configurator assigns to the interface a unique handset number inside the system.
M = Operating mode
factory configuration with 3

346850

IN T

N = 13

EXT
ON

system identification
number on the
handsets side

3M
3

123

OF F

N = 12

operating mode

N
M
Example of configuration

1N 2 3M

N = 12
N=1

2 WIRE riser

No handset within the system can be
configured with N = 12

the interface must
be considered as
handset number 12

BT00662-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 369

TECHNICAL SHEETS

System expansion
interface

346851

Description

Interface in DIN modular enclosure, used to increase the performance of the 2 WIRE
system in one-family or apartment installations. It enables creating 2 WIRE risers with
entrance panels at the bottom of the stairs, independent audio and video, as well as
providing expansion for: regeneration of the video signal and extension of distances for
a further 200 meters (cable item 336904 required), increase of the number of devices
that can be connected to the BUS, and use of up to a maximum of 3 interface modules
connected in cascade.

346851

2
3
ON

Technical data

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Dissipated power:
Operating temperature:
Absorption:
IN clamp (configuration Mod = 0)
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:

IN clamp (configuration Mod = 5 - mod = 6)
Stand by absorption:
5 mA
Max. operating absorption:
30 mA
50 mA
50 mA

OUT clamp (configuration Mod = 2 - mod = 7)
Stand by absorption:
30 mA
Max. operating absorption:
50 mA
OUT clamp (configuration Mod = 5 - mod = 6)
Stand by absorption:
15 mA
Max. operating absorption:
50 mA

Dimensional data

Size: 4 DIN modules
BT00663-a -EN

370 2 WIRE VDE system

OFF

30 mA
30 mA

IN clamp (configuration Mod = 2 - mod = 7)
Stand by absorption:
20 mA
Max. operating absorption:
30 mA

OUT clamp (configuration Mod = 0)
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:

18 – 27 Vdc
2.25 W (max)
5 – 40°C

4
*

Legend

1. OUT clamps for the connection of the output SCS BUS
2. Interface status notification LED:
- green flashing = STAND BY
- green steady = IN - OUT connection active
3. Video signal level notification LED:
- green steady = operation OK
- green / red = operation nearing the limit
- red steady = no video signal or limit exceeded
4. Presetting - Not used
5. Configurator socket - the socket marked with the asterisk * is NOT USED
6. SCS/BUS IN connection clamps
7. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346851
Configuration

The device must be configured with physical configurator connection to the
appropriate sockets as follows:
M = progressive number within the system
The configurator connected to the M sockets (from 1 to 99) assigns an identification
number within the system to the interface. Addresses in M with (MOD = 0 - MOD
= 2 - MOD = 7) and (MOD = 5 - MOD = 6) ARE NOT IN CONFLICT.

MOD *

MOD = operating mode
The configurator connected to the MOD socket of the interface defines its operating
mode as follows:
MOD = 0 (no configurator connected) - Galvanic separation MODE
MOD = 2 - ENTRANCE PANEL line EXPANSION MODE

* Not used
MOD = 5 - Independent risers MODE
MOD = 6 - Extended riser MODE
MOD = 7 - Extended riser expansion MODE

MOD = 0 (galvanic separation)
This configuration mode is used to double the line length or to increase the system
performance - see the following example:

MOD = 2 (entrance panel line expansion)
This mode is used in systems with interface connection between the entrance panel
and the F441 audio/video node, to extend the entrance panel line – see the following
example:
To the handsets/interfaces

BUS PI
346851
=–
M
=2
MOD = –

346000

F441
OUT1

346851

BUS BUS
PI
TK

PRI

346000
PRI 230 V~ 50 - 60 Hz 260 mA
BUS 27V 1,2A
2-1

}

346000
PRI 230 V~ 50 - 60 Hz 260 mA
BUS
2 - 1 27V 1,2A

}

IN1

230 Vac

IN2

IN3

IN4

346851

ON OFF

ON
N

PRI

346000
PRI 230 V~ 50 - 60 Hz 260 mA
BUS
2 - 1 27V 1,2A

}

BUS
PE

BUS 2 1

SCS

346851

346000

346851

OFF

CEBEC

IP30

=–
=1
MOD = 2
M

346000
N

PRI

BUS 2 1

BUS
PE

230 Vac

346000
PRI 230 V~ 50 - 60 Hz 260 mA
BUS
2 - 1 27V 1,2A

}

BUS BUS
PI
TK

WARNING
PS

� After the system expansion module item
346851, 200 metres of line B are available
(interface 346851 - Furthest Handset).
A maximum of 3 interfaces item 346850 and
item 346851 can be installed in cascade. Only
2 of them will regenerate the signal.

230 Vac

BUS BUS
PI
TK

WARNING

BT00663-a -EN

200 m
line A

CEBEC

IP30

BUS 2 1

346830

CEBEC

IP30

230 Vac

200 m
line B

PRI

OUT

BUS 2 1

346830

ON OFF

346000

OUT4

OFF

=–
=1
MOD = –

OUT3

CEBEC

IP30

OUT2

� After the system expansion module item 346851 200
metres of line B are available (interface 346851 - Furthest
Handset). A maximum of 3 interfaces item 346850 and
item 346851 can be installed in cascade. Only 2 of them
M - interface progressive
will regenerate the signal.
number (from 1 to 99)

2 WIRE VDE system 371

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346851

MOD = 5 (independent risers)
This mode is used to create systems with 2 WIRE risers, with independent audio and
video (39 risers maximum) - see the following example:
The handsets connected to the single riser will be identified at the main entrance panel
by the M configurator of 346851 x 100 + the N configurator of the single handset.

MOD

Riser 7

5
Riser No.

Independent riser
interface

Riser
1

Riser
2

Riser
3

718

Handset 18

346851
346851

346851

M=1
Mod = 5

346851

OFF

M=2
Mod = 5

M = 39
Mod = 5

OFF

M=7
MOD = 5

OFF

N = 18

Main entrance
panel

2 wire backbone

2 wire backbone
As far as the EP is concerned, the handset is number 718: this is the M of 346851 (7) x
100 + N of the handset connected to the riser (18).
(7 x 100) + 18 = 718

NOTE:
A maximum of 3 interfaces item 346850 and 346851 can be installed in cascade. Only 2
of them will regenerate the signal.

BT00663-a-EN

372 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346851

MOD = 6 (extended riser)
MOD = 7 (extended riser expansion)
These configuration modes offer the possibility of riser line expansion up to the logic
limit of 300 riser handsets (3 lines of 100 handsets each).
The limit of 100 handsets for each line is subjected to the use of apartment interface
item 346850.

When interface item 346850 is not used, this 100 handsets line limit will be further
reduced (refer to the system technical guide for more information).
Interface item 346850 CANNOT be installed on the last line. It is possible to cross up to
3 interfaces item 346850 and 346851 connected in cascade.

BUS PI

Handsets
(301 – 399)

Handsets
(101 – 399)

Handsets
(601 – 699)

Handsets
(401 – 699)

346851
=–
M
=3
MOD = 7

346851
=–
M
=6
MOD = 7

346851

ON OFF

346851

ON OFF

OFF

346850

EXT
ON

346850

INT

Handsets
(201 – 299)

EXT

Handsets
(501 – 599)

OF F

346851

Note 2: for this type of systems
we recommend that you contact
your local technical support
service representative.

346851

ON OFF

OFF

346850

EXT

346850

INT

Handsets
(101 – 199)

EXT

Handsets
(401 – 499)

OF F

Maximum 100 interfaces item 346850

346851
346851

ON OFF

OFF

346851

ON OFF

346851
=–
M
=7
MOD = 6
ON

OFF

BT00663-a -EN

=–
M
=4
MOD = 6

346851

OF F

346851

ON OFF

346850

INT

=–
M
=1
MOD = 6

346851
=–
M
=5
MOD = 7

Note 1: maximum 3 interfaces
item 346850 and 346851 can be
installed in cascade. Two of them
will regenerate the signal.

OF F

346851

ON OFF

346850

INT

=–
M
=2
MOD = 7

Handsets
(701 – 999)

EP BUS
(Main Entrance Panel)

2 WIRE VDE system 373

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Actuator

346200

Description
Relay actuator for digital systems. It allows to switch on lights, to open gate door locks,
to control other devices and to repeat call on bell (badenia type).

MOD

N/P

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
Contact output:

18 – 27 Vdc
15 mA
30 mA
5 – 40 °C
230 Vac - 6 A resistive - 2 A inductive (cosϕ = 0.5)
SELV device

Dimensional data
4 DIN modules

Legend
1 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire BUS and power supply 1 - 2
2 - Clamps for the connection of the load to be controlled
3 - Clamps for the connection of an additional pushbutton
4 - Configurator socket

BT00664-a-EN

374 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346200

Configuration
MOD

The device must be physically configured in terms of:

N/P T

MOD = Operating mode
The configurator in MOD establishes the operating mode of the actuator (see following
tables)

M = number of the riser
In systems with several risers, it identifies on which riser the actuation must be
performed
N/P = Handset/Entrance panel number
It defines the association with the Handset or the EP address from which the actuation
must be performed.
T = relay closure time delay
The configurator connected to T sets the relay closing time delay (see corresponding
table).
MOD = 0 - Staircase light from any handset and EP
- The actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of the handset and the light
key on the entrance panel
- Customize the time through the configurator T.

MOD = 1 - Sundry services (door lock/open the gate/staircase light) from
handset unit
- The actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of the handset belonging to
a group
- Customize the time through the configurator T.
- Insert in M the ten and the units of the first handset of the group
- Insert in N/P the ten and the units of the last handset of the group
NOTE: a group is a sequence set of handsets.

MOD = 2 - Staircase lights from all riser handsets
- The actuator is enabled by pressing the staircase light key of all riser handsets
- Customize the time through the configurator T.
- Connect the M configurator of the system expansion interface, item 346851
(configured with MOD = 5) to M

MOD

N/P

T = 0 closes the contact for 30”

Example
MOD

N/P

1
Tens

Unit

MOD

Tens

N/P

1 1 2 1

Door lock control from the light key of the
handsets configured from 1 to 12
T = 1 closes the contact for 1”

Unit

Example
MOD

N/P

MOD

2
Tens

N/P

2 1 9
Staircase light control from all handsets of
the riser 19
T = 0 closes the contact for 30”

Unit

MOD

2 4

N/P

BT00664-a-EN

MOD = 2 - Staircase lights from all entrance panel (if fitted with the
corresponding key)
- With (MOD = 2) the actuator activates when the light pushbutton of any (preset)
entrance Panel is pressed
- Customize the time through the configurator T.

Not inserting the configurator
corresponds to insert 0

2 WIRE VDE system 375

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346200
MOD = 3 - Sundry services from single handset
- The actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of only one handset.
- Customize the time through the configurator T.
- Put in N/P the ten and the units of the handset that controls the relay

Example
MOD

N/P

MOD

N/P

MOD

4
Unit

N/P

BT00664-a -EN

376 2 WIRE VDE system

N/P

3 5

Door lock control from the light key of the
handset configured with P=3
T=5 closes the contact for 1 min

MOD

Tens

MOD = 7 - Light on for illumination of the viewing field
At the same time as sending a call from the entrance panel or activating a camera (N/P
configuration), the actuator also closes the contact, keeping it closed until:
- if the call is answered, the contact opens when the communication is terminated or
the conversation timeout activates (<1 min.)
- if the call is not answered, the contact opens after 30 seconds (at the end of the call
forwarding timeout).

1 5 1

Example
MOD

Unit

MOD = 5 - Door lock control from PIVOT/SWING/POLYX handsets additional keys
- Direct door lock opening with handset in pause.
- Customize the time through the configurator T.
- Insert in N/P the address that the actuator must take inside the system.
The N/P value inserted in the actuator must be between P + 1 and P + 4 of
the P configurator P inserted in the handset which controls the door lock.
For further information on the configurations of the SWING/POLYX handsets and the 4
additional keys set for PIVOT make reference to the relating technical sheets.

Example
MOD

Tens

MOD = 5 - Door lock control from all handsets
- Direct door lock opening with handset in pause. The actuator is enabled by pressing
the door lock pushbutton of all handsets.
- Customize the time through the configurator T.
- Put in N/P the ten and the units of the associated entrance panel that controls the door
lock.

N/P

Door lock control from the light key of the
handset configured with 15
T=1 closes the contact for 1 s

Unit
Tens

MOD = 4 - Staircase light from EP
- With (MOD = 4) the actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of only one
entrance panel.
- Customize the time through the configurator T.
- Put in N/P the ten and the units of the handset that controls the relay

N/P

2 1

Door lock control of the entrance panel
configured with P=2 from the door lock
pushbutton of all the associated handsets
T=1 closes the contact for 1 s

Example
MOD

N/P

MOD

N/P

Door lock control by pressing the key
2 of the 4 keys set for PIVOT (PIVOT
configured with P = 0)
T=1 closes the contact for 1 s

P+1
P+2
P+3
P+4

Example
MOD

N/P

7
The number of the EP or camera to
associate to the actuator

MOD

N/P

Closing of contact upon call from the
EP configured with P=2.
The contact opens after the call is
terminated or after 30 seconds
(if there is no answer)

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346200
MOD = 9 - Sundry services (door lock/open the gate/staircase light) from
PIVOT/SWING/POLYX handsets additional keys
- Direct door lock opening with handset in pause.
- Customize the time through the configurator T.
- Insert in N/P the address that the actuator must take inside the system.
The N/P value inserted in the actuator must be between P + 1 and P + 4 of the P
configurator P inserted in the handset which controls the service.
For further information on the configurations of the SWING/POLYX handsets and the
4 additional keys set for PIVOT make reference to the relating sections configurations.

Example
MOD

N/P

MOD

N/P

3 2

Device control by pressing the key 2 of the 4
keys set for PIVOT (PIVOT congured with P = 2)
T=2 closes the contact for 3 s

P+1
P+2
P+3
P+4

MOD = SLA - Call repetition on Badenia bell
- Repeat the calls coming from the entrance panel on Badenia bell.
- Customize the time through the configurator T (Accepted configurators are: 1, 2, 3, 4
and 8).
- Insert in N/P the tens and units of the handset associated to the function.

Example
MOD

S
L
A

* The SLA configurator must be bought separately from the configurator kit
(item 3501K). Item code for SLA configurator: item 3501/SLA.

N/P

MOD

S
L
A

3
Unit
Tens

N/P

1 6 3

The Badenia bell rings for 6 seconds each
time there is a call addressed to the handsets
configured with N=16
T =3 the Badenia bell rings for 6 s and stops
when the call is answered

T configuration (timing)
The T values mentioned in the examples are only an indication of the times commonly
used for the different applications.
By inserting in the T socket a configurator (as mentioned in the table) the relay door
locking time can be customized.

T configurator

Time

none

3 min.

1 sec.

3 sec.

6 sec.

10 sec.

1 min.

6 min.

10 min.

pushbutton

cyclic (ON/OFF)

BT00664-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 377

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346200
Wiring diagram

5
1

BUS IN

6
2

8
4

7
3

BUS OUT
NC C NO

230V~
6A

= 0,5

SELV

2-wire standard wiring diagram
Bus PI

Bus TK

346000

346200

BUS BUS
TK
PI
PS
BUS

346830

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

230V a.c.

~
2

BT00664-a -EN

378 2 WIRE VDE system

C NO

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Door lock actuator

346230

Description
2-wire system door lock actuator.
It can be used to actuate an electrical door lock without the need for a local transformer,
activated by a dedicated handset key.
In systems with handsets with specific LED, it enables to perform the “LOCK STATUS”
function when a CISA ELETTRIKA door lock is used.

1
2 PL

S+ S-

346230

Related items
346240 CISA ELETTRIKA door lock accessory
Technical data

J J

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
Contact load (PL/S+):

18 – 27 Vdc
10 mA
300 mA
5 – 40 °C
6 A – 24 Vac max (cosϕ=1)

T M M M
P P

3
Legend

Dimensional data

1 - Clamps for the connection of door lock and additional pushbutton
2 - Configurator socket
3 - 2 WIRE BUS connection clamps

2 DIN modules
Configuration
The device must be physically configured in terms of:
P - Associated entrance panel number
A configurator like the one connected to P of the entrance panel must be connected to
this socket. When the actuator is associated to the main entrance panel, no configurator
must be connected to P.

J J
T M M M

P P

T - Door lock relay timing
The configurator connected to T sets the relay closing time delay as shown in the
following table:
configurator number
0= No
configurator
4 sec.

The accessory item 346240
must be fitted inside the
door lock.

18V 4A

1 sec. 2 sec.

3
3 sec.

as
6 sec.
pushbutt.

8 sec. 10 sec.

2 PL

ELETTRIKA

S+ S-

P
P

J J
J M
J
T M1 M
1 2
P P

J J

T 1 M M
P P

M=1

BT00665-a -EN

M - Operating mode
M=0 - Door lock relay standard operation
M=1 - Door lock relay operation + “door lock status control” – only with handsets fitted
with door lock status LED and specific CISA ELETTRIKA door lock with Accessory item
346240.
M=4 - With interface 349410 only it enables:
- with analogue system and audio Tersystem, the direct control of the electrical door lock
- with videoporter 2000, the call to the switchboard

JMP - Jumpers to be removed when an auxiliary transformer is used (4A max.)

2 WIRE VDE system 379

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346230
Wiring diagram - 2-wire standard

Wiring diagram - with auxiliary transformer

SCS-BUS

18 V - 4 A impulsive
250 mA holding current

*A = door lock release
pushbutton
1

2 PL

S+ S-

2 PL

346230

J J
P

T M M M
P P

346000

Remove the jumpers
*A= door lock release
pushbutton

BT00665-a-EN

380 2 WIRE VDE system

J J
M M
P P

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Timed door lock
actuator

346260

Description
Timed door lock actuator for 2 WIRE system.
It can be used for switching the lights on, opening gates, or manage electromagnetic
door locks, timed door opening, and door status (with NC contact).
The DOOR STATUS function can only be used with door entry systems and video door
entry systems fitted with signalling LEDs, and when a magnetic door status contact is
present.
It may also be used in systems integrated with an appropriately configured ACCESS
CONTROL system.
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
5 mA
250 mA
5 – 40 °C

- TMP PL RC

C NC

NO/S+ S-

ART. 346260
T= -5 +45°C
IP 30

7
6
5

SCS

J J
M M
P P

3
- TMP PL RC

Dimensional data
4 DIN modules

WARNING: if the TMP and RC contacts are not used,
short circuit TMP and RC with (-)

Legend
1 - Door status connection clamps:
(-) Common
(TMP) Anti tamper line contact (normally closed on -)
(PL) Door opening pushbutton contacts (normally open on -)
(RC) Door status magnetic contact (normally closed on -)
2 - Electromagnetic door lock connection clamps:
(C) Common
(NC) Normally closed contact
(NO/S+) Normally open contact
(S-) Contact for door lock power supply from BUS (to be used with NO/S+)
3 - Configurator socket
4 - Notification orange LED: on when the relay is active
(flashing orange + red LEDs for open door notification)
5 - 2 WIRE BUS connection clamps
6 - Notification red LED: flashing in case of system tampering
7 - Door opening local pushbutton

BT00666-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 381

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346260
Configuration
The device must be physically configured in terms of:

P - Associated entrance panel number
A configurator like the one inserted in P of the entrance panel must be connected to
this socket. When the actuator is associated to the main entrance panel, no configurator
must be connected to P.

Management of
access control
Management of 2 WIRE
video door entry system

Actuator relay status

A B C

J1 J2
J J
M M
P P

A = DO NOT USE (access control only)
B - C = P CONFIGURATOR SOCKETS

M = Operating mode
Assigns the operating mode to the internal relay of the actuator, based on the following
table:

YES

Signal
repetition

YES

Normally
open

Normally closed.
Electromagnetic
door lock

Signal
repetition

Normally closed.
Electromagnetic
door lock

Normally
open

Normally
closed

Normally
open

R = Enabling/disabling of the anticipated relay switching function(1)
Configurator
Advance of closing

Enabled (2 sec.)

Disabled

T = Door lock relay timing
Configurator
Configurator

Time
Time sec.
sec.

10
10

20
20

40
40

60
60

90
90

180
180

J1 - J2 = Jumpers for the selection of the door lock power supply
CONNECTED = DOOR LOCK POWERED BY THE BUS
DISCONNECTED = DOOR LOCK POWERED BY AN EXTERNAL DEVICE
Note:
(1) If enabled, 2 seconds after the opening of the entrance, anticipated relay switching
occurs, irrespective of the T time set (this function can be used with door status
magnetic contact and for T = s).
BT00666-a -EN

(2) The device supplies the NC and NO contacts of the internal relay. It is therefore
possible, also with M = 0, to use the internal relay as normally closed.
It must be noted that in case of power cut from the power line (230 Vac), the relay
stays normally closed and, if the power supply of the electric door lock is fitted with
a back-up battery, the door lock stays closed.

(3) In this mode, the software forces the relay to perform the opposite operation
(positive safety). The NO contact stays in the closed status, and is opened in order to
open the door (passage). In case of power cut from the main power line (230 Vac),
the relay opens, and the door lock opens, even if the power supply line of the door
locks is fitted with a back-up battery.
(4) Operation as signal repeater. In case of system intrusion or opening of a door,
the relay output can also activate an external notification device (sound or visual
notification), based on the time value set in T.
(5) Integration mode between video door entry system and access control (see
instructions of item 348000).

382 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346260
Connection example
S2
A

EP: P=1

18 V 4 A

T S

1
BUS
H
TK BUS

C NC

NO/S+ S-

T= -5 +45°C
IP 30

BUS
TK

346000

BUS

- TMP PL RC

ART. 346260

SCS
PS

BUS

A
= Door lock pushbutton in the entrance-hall
*S+ S- = 18V 4A impulsive 250mA
holding current

BUS
PI

S+ S2 1

J J
M M
P P

M R T J1 J2

J J
M M
P P

A
S1

230 Vac

346830

BT00666-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 383

TECHNICAL SHEETS

8/2-WIRE interface

346150

Description
1

8/2-WIRE interface is a device that can be used for installing mixed video door entry
systems, with common backbones using the digital system (8 WIRES), and risers using
the 2 WIRE system.
It is ideal for very large systems as all the performance advantages of the digital system
can be combined with the installation advantages of the 2 WIRE system (simple wiring
system, intercommunication, no need for local power supply of monitors).
The device must be used together with the 346000 power supply.
In installing a system with local entrance panel, the entrance panel itself may be wired
using both the 2 WIRE, or the 8 WIRE procedure.

PE
5
1

6
2

OUT M
7
3

8
4

OUT

M1 N1

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

PS
BUS PI

2
1
BUS TK

JMP

OUT

5
1

6
2

7
3

OUT

8
4

3
4
5
6

Related items
346000 (2 WIRE system power supply)

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
Operating temperature:
5 – 40 °C
SELV device
BACKBONE SIDE (IN-OUT):
- Stand-by absorption:
60 mA
- Max. operating absorption: 145 mA
RISER SIDE (EP-OUT M):
- Stand-by absorption:
25 mA
- Max. operating absorption: 110 mA
Dimensional data
6 DIN modules

BT00667-a-EN

384 2 WIRE VDE system

Legend
1 - 8 WIRE local entrance panel connection clamp
2 - 2 WIRE riser and power supply connection clamp
3 - Configurator socket
4 - Local conversation active signalling LED
5 - Powered device flashing (stand by) signalling LED
6 - Conversation with backbone active signalling LED
7 - 8 WIRE backbone (IN-OUT) connection clamps
NOTE: the three flashing LEDs indicate a device configuration error.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346150

Configuration

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

OUT

1 9

2
1
BUS TK

3 must be physically configured to set the operating mode:
The device

M1
M1

PS
BUS PI

M2 N2

MODE A: It is possible to generate up to 40 risers, each with up to 100 handsets (devices).
N2
The total number of handsets installed on the riser column must also include any
handsets
1 9 and video handsets connected in parallel. With each extra device added in
parallel to the base device, the total number of calls or apartments decreases by one. It
is recommended that the risers in M1 are numbered starting with 1.
The configurators must only be connected to the M1 position. On the generated riser,
handsets (max. 100) must be configured (in N) from 1 to 99.
IN

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

Handsets
from 103 to 103

The connected handset must
be configured with N =1
PE

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

2 1 9

Handsets
from 219 to 219

The connected handset must
be configured with N =1
IN

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

6
2

7
3

J
J
M
P

8
4

N1 = Call number
Mode A: MUST not be configured.
Mode B: it allocates the initial number of the handsets installed on the riser.
M2 = number of the riser
Mode A: MUST not be configured.
Mode B: It allocates to the handsets the number of the riser they belong to (it must be
equal to M1)
N2 = Call number
Mode A: MUST not be configured.
Mode B: it allocates the final number of the handsets installed on the riser

OUT

M2 N2

M1 = number of the riser
It allocates to the handsets the number of the riser they belong to

NOTE: if only one handset can be installed on a riser (M1=M2 and N1=N2), the
handset shall always be configured with N=1 due to the fact that the call on the 2 WIRE
line (in this configuration) becomes general.

5
1

OUT

MODE B: it is possible to generate up to 100 risers, with the possibility of installing on
each of them a number of handset based on the value of the configurator connected to
M1 and N1. However, the total number of calls in the system is 4000.
The configurators to be used are M1, N1, M2, N2; for each riser these will define the
address of the first and the last video handset of the riser.
In this mode M1 must be the same as M2, and therefore up to 100 call address Handsets
(N1 and N2) may be allocated to each riser.

JMP

J = Selection of the secondary riser entrance panel
It is possible to install a riser EP belonging to the 2 WIRE system range or a riser EP
belonging to the digital system range However, both types of EPs cannot be installed
at the same time.
Configurator J connected = 2 WIRE system EP
M1
N1
M2 = digital
N2
J system EP (6-8 wires)
Configurator J disconnected

PS
BUS PI

2
1
BUS TK

J
M
P

JMP

OUT

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

BT00667-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 385

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346150
Example of configuration in mode (A)
If M1=2 the 100 handsets installed on this riser will take on the absolute address from
201 to 299 and will be configured from N=1 to N=99.
N

992

2
P

186

2
N

994

2
2

BT00667-a-EN

8
M1

J
J
M
P

(101-199)

2
(201-299)

J
J
M
P

(301-318)

M1 1

Example of configuration in mode (A):
The EP must be realised using numeric or alphanumeric call modules. On the 8/2 interface it is possible to install both 2 WIRE or 6/8 WIRE secondary (or local) entrance
panels. On the risers it is possible to install both audio and video 2 WIRE handsets, complying with the installation limits of the 2 WIRE system.

386 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346150
Example of configuration in mode (B)
If M1=12 N1=50 and M2=12 N2=65, on the riser the handsets will have an absolute
address going from 1250 to 1265. Therefore the riser handsets must themselves be
configured in N from 50 to 65.
N

2
N

Floor
shunt
2

136

Floor
shunt
2

114

Floor
shunt

216

124

1 8

112

J
J
M
P

(109-112)

(101-108)

113

121

(113-121)

BT00667-a-EN

M1 = M2

Example of configuration in mode (B)
On the 8/2 interface it is possible to install both 2 WIRE or 6/8 WIRE secondary (or local) entrance panels. On the risers it is possible to install both audio and video 2 WIRE
handsets, complying with the installation limits of the 2 WIRE system.

2 WIRE VDE system 387

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346150
Wiring diagrams
Connection of local 8 WIRE EP

Connection of local 2 WIRE EP

BUS PI

BUS

(PI)

BUS PI

OUT M

7 8

1 2

3 4

M1
5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

OUT M

M1 N1

PS
BUS P

6
2

7
3

8
4

Other EPs or
switchboards
8

BT00667-a-EN

388 2 WIRE VDE system

2
1
I B US TK

J
J
M
P

BUS 2 1
PE

346000

346150
5
1

BUS 2 1

J
PE

OU T

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

OUT M

M1 N1

Other EPs or
switchboards
8

6
2

PS
BUS P

2
1
I B US TK

346000

346150

8
4

230 Vac

5
1

JM P

5 6

BUS

(PE)

OUT M

(PE)

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

OU T

5
1

6
2

7
3

8
4

230 Vac
8

TECHNICAL SHEETS

ANALOGUE/2 wire interface

349410

Description

ANALOGUE/2 WIRE communication interface.
It can be used for interfacing an ANALOGUE, 8 WIRE DIGITAL, TERSYSTEM audio, and
VIDEOPORTER 2000 riser to a dedicated apartment 2 WIRE video door entry system with
local video monitoring system, sound system, and MY HOME application control.
Activations addressed on the ANALOGUE/8 WIRE side are not possible.
NOTE: The configuration of private devices (entrance panels, actuators, video cameras
etc.), must start from 1.

Related items

346000 (2-wire system power supply)
F441 (audio/video node)
346830 (video adapter)

4
5

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
Operating temperature:
5 - 40°C
Absorption:
SIDE (INT): Stand by absorption:
15 mA
Max. operating absorption: 55 mA
SIDE (EXT): Stand by absorption:
15 mA
Max. operating absorption: 35 mA
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules

Legend
1 - Clamps for the connection of the ANALOGUE system riser
2 - Trimmer for the adjustment of the video signal
3 - Trimmer for the adjustment of the incoming audio signal
4 - Trimmer for the adjustment of the outgoing audio signal
5 - Interface status notification LED:
(Flashing green = STAND BY)
(Fixed green = active INT-EXT connection)
6 - Configurator socket
7 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire SCS BUS

BT00668-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 389

TECHNICAL SHEETS

349410
Configuration

MOD

The device must be physically configured in terms of:
MOD = type of riser connected on the input
The configurator connected to MOD indicates to which type of riser our input is
connected to the device:
MOD = 0
MOD = 1
MOD = 2
MOD = 3

audio or video 8 WIRE DIGITAL riser
audio or video ANALOGUE riser
VIDEOPORTER 2000 riser
TERSYSTEM audio riser

349410 Videoporter
Clamps (EXT)
Video
Audio
Video
Audio
2000
1
1
1
1
1
15 (20)
2
2
2
19
3
3
3
3
3
1
4
4
4
4
4
21
5
5
5
5
5
17
6
6
6
6
*
13
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
14
14
14
14
12
12
-

Tersystem
Audio
3
2
1
6

*
-

NOTE: activations addressed on the analogue/2 wire side are not possible.
For more information refer to the instruction leaflet supplied with the item.
*

For direct control of the electric door lock, a door lock actuator, item 346230/346260, must be installed

Direct electrical door lock control connection diagram

Riser

349410

346230

2 PL S+ S-

346230

BT00668-a-EN

-6(

)

- T (Tersystem Audio)
P

4T M J1 J2

P 4
T

BUS

390 2 WIRE VDE system

J J
MM
P P

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Door lock relay

346250

Description
Relay module for gate opening to be used only with audio/video SFERA New, SFERA
ROBUR, SFERA Classic item 342560, LINEA 2000, LINEA 2000 METAL and MINISFERA
entrance panels.
It allows to open door locks (NOT managed by BUS) by means of the above mentioned
entrance panels (NOT fitted with relay). The device must not be configured.

S- S+

NC NO

Related items
341000 (SFERA New - SFERA Robur BASIC speaker phone module)
341100 (SFERA New - SFERA Robur speaker phone module)
341200 (SFERA New - SFERA Robur audio video module)
341300 (SFERA New - SFERA Robur wide angle audio video module)
342560 (SFERA Classic audio/video speaker module)
342702 (MINISFERA audio speaker module)
342708 (MINISFERA video speaker module)
342911/21 (LINEA 2000 audio EP)
342951/61 (LINEA 2000 video EP)
342971/72 (LINEA 2000 METAL audio EP)
342981/82 (LINEA 2000 METAL b/w video EP)
342991/92 (LINEA 2000 METAL colour video EP)
343001/02 (LINEA 2000 METAL flush mounted EP)

Legend
1 - Clamps for connection to the entrance panel
2 - Clamps- contacts for connection to the electrical door lock

Connection example

BUS
PL
S+
S-

346250

S- S+

NC NO

NO
NC
C

24 Vac/24 Vdc
24 Vac
24 Vac

D - EP - relay distance

BT00669-a-EN

Max. distance (D) depending on the cable used
TYPE OF CABLE
CABLE SECTION

mm²
0.28

BTicino
Item 336904

BTicino
Item L4669

mm²
1

30 m

50 m

30 m

100 m

A = door lock release pushbutton

2 WIRE VDE system 391

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Coaxial to 2 WIRE
interface

347400

Description
Interface used for connecting the cameras with 12 Vdc power supply (max. absorption
150 mA) and coaxial video output (1 Vpp @ 75 ohm) to the 2-wire video BUS.
The interface provides direct power supply to the camera.
the device can be used as an interface for the separate camera; to associate a camera to
an audio entrance panel simply configure both the camera and the entrance panel using
the same configurator in P.

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
Stand by absorption:
5 mA
Max. operating absorption: 210 mA - see note (*)
Operating temperature:
(-20) – (+70)°C
(*) note: max. 150 mA when the interface supplies power to the 12 V camera

4
Dimensional data

Distance
347400 - COAX cameras
max. 3 m

Legend

BASIC plastic enclosure
18 mm

40 mm

BT00670-a-EN

392 2 WIRE VDE system

1 - 2 WIRE BUS connection clamps
2 - Configurator socket (to access remove the upper plastic protection cover)
3 - Clamps for the connection of the camera power supply (12 Vdc - 150 mA max.)
4 - Clamps for the connection of the camera video signal output

TECHNICAL SHEETS

347400
Configuration
The device must be physically configured in terms of:
P

P = camera address
The configurator in seat P of the interface assigns to it a recognition number inside
the system. The interface is considered as a video entrance panel, therefore it must be
configured with a progressive number in relation to (P) of the entrance panel.

N Z M A PL

N = address of the handset called in case of alarm
In those systems integrated with Bticino burglar alarm systems, the configurator
connected to N of the interface, determines which handset must be called in case of
alarm occurred in the Z zone configured in the interface. Then, the handset will display
the images of the interface associated to the Z zone.
Z = zone of the burglar-alarm system associated to the camera
M = Operating mode
M = 0 - standard operation
M = SLA - Configuration for association to several audio EP
A/PL = Address of the SCS light actuator connected to the camera
Address of the scenarios module associated to the camera
In systems integrated with BTicino automation applications, the configurator connected
to A/PL of the interface associates the switching on of the camera with the activation of
a SCS actuator configured with the same A/PL.
(Example: switching on of lights to illuminate the field of view, only with camera active).

M= SLA

S
N Z L A PL
A

PI - PN = Range of audio EP associated
to the camera (max 5).

BT00670-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 393

TECHNICAL SHEETS

347400
Configuration
Example of configuration

EP 1

Interface
CAM. 1

EP 2
P

T S

Interface
CAM. 2

T S

N Z M A PL

System with 2 video EP and 2 cameras.

EP 1

Interface
CAM. 1
P

T S

Interface
CAM. 2
N Z M A PL

N Z M A PL

System with audio EP and 2 camera (CAM. 1 associated to the EP)

N Z M A PL
1

S
L
A

N Z M A PL

S
L
A

Pi: address of the first audio EP
Pn: address of the last audio EP
BT00670-a -EN

BUS
TK

346000

BUS
PI

PS
346000

P=0

P=1

P=2

BUS

2 1

Coupling the switching on of the camera with several audio EP (max. 5)

394 2 WIRE VDE system

346830

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Line amplifier

346870

Description
The line amplifier is an accessory device that in 2 WIRE video systems using non-twisted
cables (with section ≥ 0.28 mm2) can be used to increase the distance between the
entrance panel and the furthest handset from 50 m to 100 m max.
The device must be installed at the 50th metre distance from the entrance panel. If it
is installed before the 50th metre, an image distortion will occur, while an installation
beyond the 50 metres will not bring any advantages.
The amplifier offers the following advantages: it does not need configuration, or power
supply, and can be installed in a round box thanks to it compact size.
On the new riser line generated by the amplifier it will be possible to install up to 18
handsets (maximum), including both audio and video handsets.

346870
IN

OUT

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
20 mA
20 mA
5 – 40 °C

Legend
1 - 2 WIRE BUS OUTPUT connection clamps
2 - 2 WIRE BUS INPUT connection clamps

Dimensional data

15 mm

52 mm

35 mm

BT00671-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 395

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Floor shunt

346841

Description

The floor distribution block can be used for video door entry systems with a star
distribution of the wiring.
The distribution block is in a plastic enclosure with much reduced dimensions for easier
positioning (above all during the refurbishments) even with the installation inside flush
mounted boxes.
It is also possible to install systems with combined wiring risers, where a part can be of
IN/OUT type and the other part is used for the floor distribution block.
The device automatically adapts the video signal.
Max. 3 devices (handsets, bells or additional bells) can be connected on the same output.

ART. 346841

The device must not be configured.
Legend

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

1 - 4 outputs (P1, P2, P3, P4) - handset BUS
2 - Input/output of riser (IN-OUT) on the same pair of clamps

18 – 27 Vdc
15 mA
15 mA
5 – 40 °C

Dimensional data
BASIC plastic enclosure

ART. 346841

BT00672-a -EN

396 2 WIRE VDE system

18 mm

40 mm

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Floor call
interface

346833

Description
Floor call interface which allows, by means of a traditional pushbutton, to make the
following functions:
- general floor call
- addressed floor call
- staircase light switching on
- Door lock opening (with specific actuator)
- associate the video image to the call to the floor

WARNING: the maximum connection distance between the interface and the
connected pushbuttons must not exceed 3 metres.
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:

18 – 27 Vdc
15 mA
15 mA
5 – 40°C

Legend

Dimensional data
BASIC plastic enclosure
18 mm

40 mm

1 - Configurator socket (to access remove the upper plastic protection cover)
2 - Clamps for the connection of the pushbuttons / contacts (connect a pushbutton
between PL1 and C and one between PL2 and C)
3 - Clamps for the connection to the 2-WIRE BUS

Configuration
The device must be physically configured in terms of:
N = address of the handset to call
(To be used only with MOD = 0)
P = address of the entrance panel associated to the door lock to open
(To be used only with MOD = 2 and MOD = 3)

MOD
0
1
2
3
4(*)

N
Handset address (00-99)
Handset address (00-99)

P
Door lock address (00-95)
Door lock address (00-95)
Camera address (00-95)

PL1
Addressed floor call
General floor call
Door lock opening
Door lock opening
-

PL2
Staircase lights from Handset with 00
Staircase lights from Handset with 00
Staircase lights from Handset with 00
Door lock opening (P+1)
-

BT00673-a-EN

MOD = Operating mode
the configurator connected to MOD assigns the operating modes to the pushbuttons
connected between (PL1 and C) and (PL2 and C), as shown in the table:

(*): see installation notes on next page.

2 WIRE VDE system 397

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346833
Installation notes
The MOD = 4 configuration mode enables associating the video image of a camera to the
call to the floor generated by the off-door pushbutton.
To use this function correctly, the following must be taken into account:
- The involved handsets, the 346833 interface, and the camera must be physically
connected on the same SCS BUS.
- In multi-family systems connect the involved devices downstream the apartment
interface item 346850 - (cameras and handsets are local resources of the individual
user).
- The active function keeps the SCS BUS busy for approximately 30”, during which no
other call can be forwarded. If the handset connects, the BUS will be busy until the
TIME OUT period elapses, or the handset itself is disconnected.
- Only the following 2-wire BTicino cameras that can be used for this function: 391670
– 391657 – 391658 – 391659 – 391667 – 391668 - 391669 – 391661 – 391662 –
391663.

BT00673-a-EN

398 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Audio/video node

F441

Description

The audio/video node is a mixer device enabling distribution of up to 4 sound sources or
2-wire audio/video risers.
The 4 outputs will all have the same signal coming from the input selected among the
4 available.
The device must not be configured.
WARNING : Connections using both screw clamps and patch cords at the same
time are NOT possible.

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Absorption from BUS:
Dissipated power:
Operating temperature:
Number of inputs available:
Number of outputs available:
Dimensional data
6 DIN modules

18 - 27 Vdc
20 mA
0.5 W
5 – 40 °C
4
4

Legend
1 - Output clamps (OUT1 - OUT2 - OUT3 - OUT4) for the connection of 2-wire video risers
or amplifiers
2 - Sockets for patch cord connection
3 - Clamps for the connection of the SCS BUS
4 - Input clamps (IN1 - IN2 - IN3 - IN4) for the connection of sound sources or entrance
panels / cameras

BT00674-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 399

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Multi-channel matrix

F441M

Description
The multi-channel matrix is a device which can distribute up to 4 stereo sound sources
and a video signal from entrance panels or cameras simultaneously.
The matrix is made up of 8 inputs and 8 outputs (to wire 8 rooms).
Video entrance panels and cameras (first 4 inputs) and stereo sound sources (last 4
inputs) can be wired in input.
On each output of the matrix there is a clearly separate room.
The rooms must be set in ascending order (room 1 - OUT, room 2 - OUT 2 etc.).
The stereo signals are distributed at the same time and independently on any output.
However, it is not possible for the audio signals of two separate sound sources to be
mixed on the same output branch.
The stereo signal of a sound sources and the video signal of one of the 2-wire video
door entry sources can travel at the same time on the same branch (entrance panel or
camera).

1
OUT 1

TK1

Power supply from SCS BUS:
Absorption da BUS:
Dissipated power:
Operating temperature:
Number of inputs available:
Number of outputs available:

OUT 3

TK2

TK3

The device must not be configured.
Technical data

OUT 2

OUT 4

TK4

OUT 5

OUT 6

OUT 7

OUT 8

BUS

Legend
18 - 27 Vdc
46 - 60 mA
1.5 W
5 – 45 °C
8
8

Dimensional data
10 DIN modules

BT00675-a -EN

400 2 WIRE VDE system

1 - Clamps for the connection of the amplifier and the video door entry system handsets.
2 - Clamps for the connection of the SCS BUS
3 - Clamps for the connection of the input sound sources (S1-S2-S3-S4)
4 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire cameras / entrance panels (TK1-TK2-TK3-TK4)

TECHNICAL SHEETS

2 WIRE to IP Interface

346890

Description

2 WIRE/IP interface in 10 DIN modular socket It can be used for the installation of very
large 2 WIRE/IP systems and a high number of devices (entrance panels, handsets
and interfaces). The system will consist of an IP backbone and 2 WIRE risers. Advanced
functions can be managed thanks to the IP switchboard (software).
The device must be configured.
Related items

346300
346000
346020
TiDeviceIP
C9451
C9455

Switchboard Suite
A/V power supply
Additional power supply
2 WIRE/IP interface configuration software
10/100 Mbit switch (wall mounted) - 8 RJ45 ports
10/100 Mbit switch (DIN 35 rail) - 6 RJ45 ports

5 4 3

Technical data

Power supply from BUS SCS:
Stand by absorption (SCS SIDE):
Stand by absorption (DC SIDE):
Max. operating absorption (SCS SIDE):
Max. operating absorption (DC SIDE) :
Operating temperature:

18 - 27 Vdc
5 mA
150 mA
70 mA
300 mA
5 - 40°C

Dimensional data

10 DIN modules
Installation notes

The following items must be considered IP devices: switchboard sw (346300), interfaces
(346890), AXOLUTE Outdoor Entrance Panel (349140), AXOLUTE Handset (HD/HC/HS
4690 - 349320 - 349321), if wired in IP mode.
The switchboard software suite offers of several services:
• call management, SoftSwitchboard (the switchboard);
• alarm logger (the server recording alarm events);
• communication framework (always present in the PC);
• alarm manager.
Therefore, a PC unit can include from a minimum of 2 and a maximum 4 IP devices.
For most installations, only one alarm recording service is sufficient.

Legend

1. Configurator socket
2. NOT USED (arrangement for future applications)
3. Clamps for the connection of the second power supply, item 346020 (clamps
1- 2)
4. USB ports for PC configuration and Firmware update
+ RESET pushbutton
5. User interface LED for the notification of:
SPEED = connection speed (on = 100 Mbit)
(off = 10 Mbit)
FULL Duplex / HALF Duplex (on = full duplex)
(off = half duplex)
LINK = network found (on = Ethernet network found)
(off = Ethernet network not found)
AUX = NOT USED
SYSTEM = power supply status (on = power connected /operating interface)
(off = power not connected)
6. NOT USED (arrangement for future applications)
7. Clamps for the connection of the 2 WIRE BUS (video door entry system
handsets)
8. Clamps for the connection of the first power supply, item 346000 (BUS clamps)

10. RJ45 for the connection of the 10/100 Mbit Ethernet LAN

BT00676-a -EN

9. Clamps for the connection of the 2 WIRE BUS (video door entry system
entrance panels)

2 WIRE VDE system 401

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346890
Configuration

The device must be configured in two different modes:
- Quick configuration (with physical configurator connection)
- Advanced configuration using the TiDeviceIP software (supplied as standard with
the device).
The quick configuration is performed by connecting the physical configurators.
The following parameters must be configured:

M1 - first part of lowest handset address (00 - 99 - OFF)
If M1 = OFF, all other sockets (N1, M2, N2) must not be configured: only entrance
panels must be connected to the interface
N1
M2
N2
C

second part of lowest handset address (00 - 99)
first part of highest handset Address (00 - 99)
second part of highest handset address (00 - 99)
IP switchboard address (1 - 9)

The quick configuration provides access to 3 operating modes:

O
M1 F
F

N1 1

* *

N2 5

MODE 1 - The device only manages entrance panels and cameras detected automatically.
The number of the IP switchboard called is connected to the C socket (1 to 9).
(*) These sockets must be left empty

* * * * * *

1 ≤ PI ≤ 5

MODE 2 - The device manages handsets with configurations between N1 and N2 and the
entrance panels/cameras detected automatically. This configuration must be used for
installations with risers with a low number of handsets and low address. The number of the
IP switchboard called is connected to the C socket (1 to 9).

* *
(*) These sockets must be left empty

112 ≤ PI ≤ 3209

BT00676-a -EN

1200 < PI 1299

M1 1

402 2 WIRE VDE system

2 N2 9

The devices manages handsets with addresses between (M1 x 100) + N1 < PI < (M2 x 100) +
N2 and entrance panels/cameras detected automatically. The number of the IP switchboard
called is connected to the C socket (1 to 9).

MODE 3 - The device manages handsets with addresses
between M1 x 100 < PI < (M1 x 100) + 99. The number of
the IP switchboard called is connected to the C socket (1 to 9).
(*) These sockets must be left empty

* * * * * *

Note: with this configuration mode, the maximum number of devices that may be
connected to the single interface is 95 entrance panels and 3900 handsets.

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346890
PHYSICAL ADDRESS AND SYSTEM ADDRESS

When the interface is configured using physical configurators, the physical and the
system address are the same; The advanced configuration using the TiDeviceIP software
gives the possibility of exceeding the 2 WIRE system address limit. This is possible by
allocating to the IU (handsets) and the EP (entrance panels) a basic local address. These
addresses give the possibility of increasing the number of handsets (basic max. 3999) and
Entrance Panels (basic max. 95), that can be managed by the video door entry system.
- Handsets: Enter the value which, when added to the physical address of the handsets
connected to the interface, will define their system address (e.g. if the handsets are
configured from 1 to 3999, and the value of 4000 is entered, the system addresses of the
handsets will be between 4001 and 7999).
- Entrance panels and door locks: Enter the value which, when added to the physical
address of the EPs connected to the interface, will define their system addresses (if the
EPs are configured from 1 to 90, and the value of 100 is entered, the system address of
the entrance panels will be from 101 to 190).

The PC advanced configuration, which can be performed using the TiDeviceIP (CD
supplied), gives the possibility of performing a higher number of functions, of
customising text, and of fully exploiting the system performance features.
In order to transfer the configuration performed using the TiDeviceIP software to the
device, or to update the Firmware, connect the 346890 interface to the PC using an USB
- mini USB cable.

NOTE : PHYSICAL ADDRESS = 2 WIRE ADDRESS
SYSTEM ADDRESS = PHYSICAL ADDRESS + BASE LOCAL EP or HANDSET ADDRESS
PHYSICAL ADDRESS

Entrance panels

Handsets

346890

USB-Mini USB cable

No physical configurator connected
EP physical address
1 – 95

Handset physical address
1 – 3999

SYSTEM ADDRESS

Entrance panels

346890

+
EP physical address
1 – 95

EP system address
101 – 190

+
TiDevice IP configuration
EP local base
IU local base
address = 100 address = 4000

WARNING: to establish connection between the device and the PC, the interface
must be powered and not physically configured.

Handset physical address
1 – 3999

Handsets

BT00676-a -EN

Entrance panels

Handsets

Handset system address
4001 – 7999

2 WIRE VDE system 403

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346890
Configuration

Max. No. of system Handsets (audio or video)
Max. No. of system EPs
Highest address that can be called from the EP
Max. no. of IP devices
Max. no. of IP switchboards
Advanced management of physical and system addresses
Configuration consistency check
Direct Entrance panel - Handset call
Activation redirection
Cycling of cameras

Quick

Advanced

3,900
95
4,000
100 (Note 1)
9
NO
YES (Note 3)
NO
NO
NO

10,000
1,000
10,000
100 (Note 1)
max.100 IP devices (Note 2)
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES

Note 1: the IP switchboard can consist of 2 to 4 IP devices depending on the activation or non-activation of the Alarm logger and the Alarm manager of the IP switchboard itself;
Note 2: the maximum no. of IP switchboards that may be installed is within the limit of the 100 IP devices maximum, taking however into account the requirements of Note 1;
Note 3: the test must be performed using the “TiDeviceIP” software.
Configuration examples
Physical SCS address

Handset from 1 to 4000

System address

Handset

346890

346890
USB

Speed

346890

ETH

Handset from 4001 to 8000

Handset

SCS

Link

Aux

USB

Handset base = 0
Entrance panel base = 0
Call base = 0

System

0319 06

SCS

AV IN

Full

USB

SCS

Speed

346890

AV OUT

ETH

SCS

USB

Link

Aux

Handset base = 4000
Entrance panel base = 0
Call base= 0

System

0319 06

SCS

AV IN

Full

SCS

AV OUT

Power supply

BUS

346890

346890
USB

Speed

LAN

346890

ETH

SCS
AV IN

Full

USB

Link

Aux

System

0319 06

SCS
AV

SCS

AV OUT

BT00676-a-EN

LAN

Calls from
1 to 4000

404 2 WIRE VDE system

USB

Handset base = 0
Entrance panel base = 0
Call base = 0

Speed

LAN

346890

ETH

SCS
AV IN

Full

USB

Link

Aux

System

0319 06

SCS
AV

SCS

AV OUT

Handset base = 0
Entrance panel base = 0
Call base = 4000

Power supply

BUS

BUS
LAN

Calls from
4001 to 8000

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346890
Configuration examples
Advanced management of the physical and system addresses of
the handsets

In order to perform (with less than 100 handsets, connected to the 346890 interface) a
configuration with system addresses across the 200 level (e.g. from 190 to 210) on a riser,
the following procedure may be followed (as an example):
• Using physical configurators, to manage less than 100 handsets with address
between 190 and 210, addresses (190 - 199) and (200 - 210) must be recreated on
the 2 WIRE system. For this purpose, two system expansion interfaces, item 346851,
must be used, appropriately configured
(Handset from 190 to 199)

(Handset from 200 to 210)

N=99 (199)

N=10 (210)

N=90 (190)

N=0 (200)

346851
346851

IN T

IN
ON

346851
MOD = 5
M=1

346851

IN T

OF F

MOD = 5
M=2

OF F

USB

BT00676-a-EN

346020

346890

346000

USB

PR I

Speed

Full

Link

Aux

System

346020
PRI: 220 - 240 V~
175-165m A
50 / 60H z
1-2 :

346890

346000

27 Vdc
600m A

0319 06

1- 2

ETH

SCS
AV IN

SCS
AV

SCS

AV OUT

BUS 2 1

LAN

2 WIRE VDE system 405

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346890
Configuration examples
Advanced management of the physical and system addresses
of the handsets

• Using the TiDeviceIP software, in order to perform a configuration with system
addresses across the 200 level (e.g. from 190 to 210) on a riser (with less than 100
handsets, connected to the 346890 interface), it will be necessary to physically
configure the handsets with address between 1 and 21, and then use the advanced
programming procedure, to assign to the 346890 interface a local base address (H =
189), which, when added to the physical address of the handsets, will recreate the
desired interval (189 + 1 = 190), (189 + 21 = 210). This solution does not require the
installation of system expansion interfaces, item 346851.
(Handset from 190 to 210)

N=21 (210)

N=2 (191)

N=1 (190)

346890

Local base address
Handsets = 189

346020

USB

BT00676-a-EN

PR I

Speed

Full

Link

Aux

System

346020
PRI: 220 - 240 V~
175-165m A
50 / 60H z
1-2 :

346890

346000

27 Vdc
600m A

0319 06

1- 2

ETH

SCS
AV IN

SCS
AV

SCS

AV OUT

BUS 2 1

LAN

406 2 WIRE VDE system

346000

USB

TECHNICAL SHEETS

2 WIRE black & white
flush mounted camera

391667-391668-391669

Description
2-WIRE black & white indoor camera for video monitoring/video surveillance
functions. Flush mounted or wall mounted installation using the items of the AXOLUTE,
Livinglight and LIGHT TECH series.
WARNINGS : do not point the camera towards the sun or towards light sources.
1
Related items
The device must be completed with the accessories and the front cover plates of the
AXOLUTE, Livinglight, LIGHT TECH residential series.
Refer to the corresponding catalogues.
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Sensor:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Lens:
Interlace:
Scanning:
Horizontal frequency:
Vertical frequency:
Image elements:
Horizontal resolution:
Minimum illumination:
Operating temperature:

+30°

18-27 Vdc
1/3” b/w CCD
5 mA
160 mA
“semi pin-hole” 3.7 mm
2:1
Standard CCIR
15625 Hz
50 Hz
537 (H) x 597 (V)
380 TV lines
1 lux
5 – 40 °C

+25°

-25°
Legend
1 - Microphone
2 - Configurator socket
3 - 2 WIRE BUS connection clamp

Dimensional data

-30°

Camera adjustment

43 mm

+ 30°

43 mm

65 mm

P
N
Z
M
A
PL

+ 25°
- 30°
- 25°

BT00677-a -EN

2 WIRE VDE system 407

TECHNICAL SHEETS

391667-391668-391669
Configuration
The device must be physically configured in terms of:
P – Camera address
The configurator assigns to the camera the address inside the apartment.
NOTE (*) : connect an OFF configurator here to disable the microphone
(function available for cameras configured from 0 to 9, for other cameras the
microphone cannot be excluded).
N – Address of the handset called in case of alarm
Z – Zone of the alarm system the camera is associated to
M – Mode of operation when a camera is switched on
Each time a camera is switched on (call, selfswitching on, alarm) the MY HOME actuator
and the scenario configured in A and PL are activated. When the camera is switched off,
the associated actuator also switches off, while the scenario remains active.
If an actuator used by the automation system is also associated to the camera, the
actuator will switch itself off when the camera is switched off, even if it was already on
when the camera came on. To avoid this problem, the load should be activated using
an actuator item F411/2, configuring different PL and setting the contacts with parallel
connection.
M
M=0
M=1-9

A/PL
Address of the SCS control device associated to the camera
Address of the scenarios module associated to the camera

BT00677-a-EN

408 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Outdoor 2-wire
colour camera

391670

Description
2-wire compact outdoor (IP65) colour camera.
It can be used for video monitoring system installations, or for turning audio systems
into video systems, using a separate camera.
WARNINGS : do not point the camera towards the sun or towards light sources.

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Enclosure:
Sensor:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Lens:
Image elements:
Horizontal resolution:
Minimum illumination:
Operating temperature:
Protection index:

P
18 – 27 Vdc
aluminium
1/3” CMOS colour
5 mA
65 mA
f: 6 mm; F: 2.3 mm
628 (H) x 586 (V)
330 TV lines at the image centre
2 Lux F=2.0
(-20) – (+70) °C; RH 95% max
IP65

Configuration
The device must be physically configured in terms of:
P – Camera address
The configurator assigns to the camera the address inside the apartment.
N – Address of the handset called in case of alarm

Dimensional data

Z – Zone of the alarm system the camera is associated to
98 mm

85 mm

38 mm

N Z M A PL

M – Mode of operation when a camera is switched on
Each time a camera is switched on (call, selfswitching on, alarm) the MY HOME
actuator and the scenario configured in A and PL are activated. When the camera is
switched off, the associated actuator also switches off, while the scenario remains
active.
If an actuator used by the automation system is also associated to the camera, the
actuator will switch itself off when the camera is switched off, even if it was already
on when the camera came on. To avoid this problem, the load should be activated
using an actuator item F411/2, configuring different PL and setting the contacts
with parallel connection.
M
M=0
M=1-9
M = SLA

A/PL
Address of the SCS control device associated to the camera
Address of the scenarios module associated to the camera
Configuration of the audio entrance panel associated to the camera
(see following details)
M = SLA

Pi - Pn = range of audio EP associated to the camera (max.5)
PI - PN =
PI
=
PN =
A/PL =

Audio entrance panels associated to the camera (max. 5)
Address of first associated EP
Address of last associated EP
Address of the SCS control associated to the camera

BT00678-a -EN

S
L A PL
A

2 WIRE VDE system 409

TECHNICAL SHEETS

Flush mounted
2 wire indoor colour camera

391657-391658-391659
391661-391662-391663

Description
2 wire indoor colour camera for video monitoring system functions. Flush mounted
or wall mounted installation using the dedicated accessories of the AXOLUTE, LIVING,
LIGHT, LIGHT TECH residential series.
WARNINGS : do not point the camera towards the sun or towards light sources.

1
Related items
The device must be completed with the accessories and the front cover plates of the
AXOLUTE, LIVING, LIGHT, LIGHT TECH residential series.
Refer to the corresponding catalogues.
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Sensor:
Stand by absorption:
Max. operating absorption:
Lens:
Interlace:
Scanning:
Horizontal frequency:
Vertical frequency:
Image elements:
Horizontal resolution:
Video signal:
Minimum illumination:
Operating temperature:

18-27 Vdc
from 1/3” colour CCD
5 mA
140 mA
“semi pin-hole” 3.7 mm
2:1
Standard CCIR
15625 Hz
50 Hz
537 (H) x 597 (V)
380 TV lines at the image centre
PAL compatible
5 lux
5 – 40 °C

Legend
1 - Microphone
2 - Configurator socket
3 - 2 WIRE BUS connection clamp

Dimensional data

Camera adjustment

43 mm

+ 30°

43 mm

65 mm

P
N
Z
M
A
PL

+ 25°
- 30°
- 25°

BT00679-a-EN

410 2 WIRE VDE system

TECHNICAL SHEETS

391657-391658-391659
391661-391662-391663
Configuration
The device must be physically configured in terms of:
P – Camera address
The configurator assigns to the camera the address inside the apartment.
NOTE (*) : connect an OFF configurator here to disable the microphone
(function available for cameras configured from 0 to 9, for other cameras the
microphone cannot be excluded).
N – Address of the handset called in case of alarm
Z – Zone of the alarm system the camera is associated to
M – Mode of operation when a camera is switched on
Each time a camera is switched on (call, selfswitching on, alarm) the MY HOME
actuator and the scenario configured in A and PL are activated. When the camera is
switched off, the associated actuator also switches off, while the scenario remains
active.
If an actuator used by the automation system is also associated to the camera, the
actuator will switch itself off when the camera is switched off, even if it was already
on when the camera came on. To avoid this problem, the load should be activated
using an actuator item F411/2, configuring different PL and setting the contacts
with parallel connection.
M
M=0
M=1-9

A/PL
Address of the SCS control device associated to the camera
Address of the scenarios module associated to the camera

BT00679-a-EN

2 WIRE VDE system 411

TECHNICAL SHEETS

2 WIRE Switchboard

346310

Description

Front view

Switchboard for 2 WIRE audio and video systems. It provides access to various services
(video door entry system functions, door lock and/or stair light management, and
monitoring of apartment alarms) directly from the keyboard, or using the intuitive
icons menu. The switchboard is supplied with built-in table-top support and has a
7” colour LCD display, receiver and handsfree, dedicated keys for the main functions,
and configurable keys. Programming can be performed directly from the device, or
using a PC with the TiSwitchBoardDevice software installed (supplied). It gives the
possibility of creating a directory of handsets, entrance panels, and switchboard.
the device DOES NOT MANAGE secondary EPs and apartment EPs (connected
downstream the apartment interface 346850). The use of additional power supply
is recommended.
It is possible to connect up to maximum 16 switchboards (configured from 0 to 15).

3
4
5

WARNING: the switchboard cannot be used in systems with 2 WIRE IP interface
346890.

7
9

Related items
336982 LIVINGLIGHT white series 8 pole socket for table-top installation of the
switchboard
336803 (8 poles - frayed) cable for table-top installation of the switchboard
346020 additional 2 DIN modules power supply

6
8
10

12 11

Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS:
Absorptions from BUS (without additional supply):
- stand by absorption:
- max. operating absorption:
Absorptions from BUS (with additional supply):
- stand by absorption:
- max. operating absorption:
Operating temperature:
Load of relay contacts:

19 – 27 Vdc
35 mA
450 mA
5 mA
20 mA
5 - 40 °C
24 Vac / 24 Vdc
3 A, cosφ = 1

Dimensional data

290 mm
210 mm

BT00680-a -EN

170 mm

412 2 WIRE VDE system

Legend
1. Handset
2. 7” colour LCD display for the displaying of the user and programming menu
and of the images recorded by the entrance panel or cameras
3. Microphone
4. Navigation keypad. It enables navigating through the menus, with the
possibility of confirming the selection (OK key)
5. Cancel key
6. Direct call key
7. Door lock release key
8. Directory access key
9. Entrance panel and camera cycling activation key
10. Handsfree key
11. Alarm warning LED
12. Operation status LED:
LED ON (steady)=device in stand-by
LED ON (flashing quickly)=call pending
LED ON (flashing slowly)=busy
13. Alphanumeric key
14. Keypad + legend of configurable functions
15. Loudspeaker

TECHNICAL SHEETS

346310
Configuration

Rear view

The switchboard must be configured as far as:
1

- Setting of the local switchboard address (0 or 1 - 15)
- Setting of the associated entrance panel address (1 - 80)
- Setting of any associated service handset
Two different configuration modes are available:
- directly from the icon menu of the switchboard
- using a PC with the TiSwitchboardDevice software installed (available in the CD supplied)
WARNING: certain specific functions, such as the filling of the directories and the
management of the ringtones, require the configuration to be performed using the PC.
3
4

To transfer the configuration performed using the software or to update the device,
connect the switchboard to the PC using the USB-mini cable.

Legend
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Mini-USB connector for PC connection
Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
Clamps for the connection of the 2-WIRE SCS BUS BTicino
Additional power supply connection clamps (1 - 2)
Clamps for the connection of the power supply of the audible signal device
(optional)

Functional notes
The maximum installation distances are the same as for 2 WIRE handsets.
Calls from entrance panels are received by all switchboards connected to the system
(the first switchboard answering takes the call).
Calls from handsets may be managed in two different ways (based on the configuration
of the handsets themselves):

To enable communication the device must be powered.

mode 1 – handsets configured with P=0 – the calls from these handsets are received
by all the switchboards of the system (the first switchboard answering takes the call).
BT00680-a -EN

mode 2 – example, Handset configured with P=81 – the calls from these handsets
are only received by the secondary switchboard configured with 1; handsets configured
with P=95 – calls from these Handsets are only received by the secondary handset
configured with 15.
The management of the operating mode (day/night) is only entrusted to the main
switchboard (configured with 0).

2 WIRE VDE system 413

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2012:11:19 14:14:50+01:00
Creator                         : Adobe InDesign CS5.5 (7.5)
Modify Date                     : 2012:11:19 14:15:32+01:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Metadata Date                   : 2012:11:19 14:15:32+01:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe InDesign CS5.5 (7.5)
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:3330392c-f778-4ed3-8108-ee3bb7b80a7e
Instance ID                     : uuid:3aeb1cff-c817-446b-864b-d49c5f2a8eca
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 9.9
Page Count                      : 227

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Technical_sheets Technical Sheets

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation